2019 SEDAN
OWNER’S MANUAL
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
3
WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including
engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands
frequently when servicing your vehicle. For
more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle
.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is
uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
Software End User License Agreement
Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by
the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which
contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User
License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your
use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services,
functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of
the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and
conditions of the End User License Agreement.
You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software
by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda
Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop
100-5E-8A, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746.
Privacy Notice
This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage
this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.
NOTICE
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol
3
and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
2 Safe Driving P. 33
For Safe Driving P. 34 Seat Belts P. 38 Airbags P. 45
2 Instrument Panel P. 77
Indicators P. 78 Gauges and Displays P. 137
2 Controls P. 163
Clock P. 164 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 166
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
P. 189
Adjusting the Seats P. 210
2 Features P. 243
Audio System P. 244 Audio System Basic Operation P. 252, 273
Customized Features P. 370, 381 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
P. 400
2 Driving P. 453
Before Driving P. 454 Towing a Trailer P. 459
Multi-View Rear Camera P. 594 Refueling P. 597
2 Maintenance P. 603
Before Performing Maintenance P. 604 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 607
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 639
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 654
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 663
Tools P. 664 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 665
Overheating P. 679 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 681
When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 695
2 Information P. 699
Specifications P. 700 Identification Numbers P. 704
Emissions Testing P. 707 Warranty Coverages P. 709
Contents
Child Safety P. 61 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 75 Safety Labels P. 76
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 180 Security System P. 183 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 186
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 190 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 208
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 221 Climate Control System P. 239
Audio Error Messages P. 343 General Information on the Audio System P. 348
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 403, 427 Refuel Recommend P. 452
When Driving P. 465 Braking P. 571 Parking Your Vehicle P. 583
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions P. 600 Turbo Engine Vehicle P. 601
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 614 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 631
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 642 Battery P. 651 Remote Transmitter Care P. 653
Cleaning P. 655 Accessories and Modifications P. 660
Engine Does Not Start P. 671 Jump Starting P. 674 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 677
Fuses P. 688 Emergency Towing P. 693 When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 694
Refueling P. 697
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 705 Reporting Safety Defects P. 706
Authorized Manuals P. 711 Customer Service Information P. 712
Quick Reference Guide
P. 4
Safe Driving
P. 33
Instrument Panel
P. 77
Controls
P. 163
Features
P. 243
Driving
P. 453
Maintenance
P. 603
Handling the Unexpected
P. 663
Information
P. 699
Index
P. 713
4
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
❙
(Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) System OFF) Button
(P 495)
❙
Safety Support Switch
(P 504, 513, 560)
❙
Parking Sensor System Button
*
(P 586)
❙
Heated Windshield Button
(P 202)
Canadian models
❙
Brightness Control
(P 203)
❙
Head-Up Display (HUD) Buttons
*
(P 157)
❙
System Indicators
(P 78)
❙
Gauges
(P 137)
❙
Driver Information Interface
(P 138)
❙
ENGINE START/STOP Button
(P 190)
❙
Climate Control System
(P 239)
❙
Rear Window Defogger
(P 202)
❙
Heated Door Mirror Button
*
(P 202)
❙
Center Pocket
(P 223)
❙
Hazard Warning Button
❙
TRIP Button
(P 140)
❙
Audio System
(P 244)
❙
Navigation System
*
() See Navigation System Manual
❙
Front Seat Heater Buttons
*
(P 236)
❙
Front Seat Heaters and Seat
Ventilation Buttons
*
(P 237)
❙
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
(P 59)
5
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Headlights/Turn Signals
(P 193)
❙
Fog Lights
*
(P 195)
❙
LaneWatch
TM*
(P 505)
Canadian models
❙
Paddle Shifter (Shift down)
*
(P 481)
❙
Left Selector Wheel
(P 139)
❙
(home) Button
(P 139)
❙
MAIN Button
(P 536)
❙
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF) Buttons
*
(P 528)
❙
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons
*
(P 537)
❙
Wipers/Washers
(P 200)
❙
Paddle Shifter (Shift up)
*
(P 481)
❙
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button
(P 552)
❙
Interval Button
(P 529, 544)
❙
Steering Wheel Adjustments
(P 207)
❙
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice Control Buttons
(P 403, 427)
❙
Audio Remote Controls
(P 248)
❙
Horn (Press an area around .)
❙
(HUD) Button
*
(P159 )
❙
Heated Steering Wheel
*
(P 235)
Canadian models
* Not available on all models
Visual Index
6
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Power Window Switches
(P 186)
❙
Master Door Lock Switch
(P 178)
❙
Door Mirror Controls
(P 209)
❙
Memory Buttons
*
(P 206)
❙
SET Button
*
(P 206)
❙
Trunk Opener
(P 180)
❙
Interior Fuse Box
(P 690)
❙
Hood Release Handle
(P 616)
❙
Driver’s Front Airbag
(P 48)
❙
Rearview Mirror
(P 208)
❙
HomeLink® Buttons
*
(P 401)
❙
Accessory Power Socket
(P 228)
❙
Passenger’s Front Airbag
(P 48)
❙
Wireless Charger
*
(P 230)
❙
USB Port
(P 245)
❙
Trunk Main Switch
*
(P 182)
❙
Glove Box
(P 223)
❙
ECON Button
(P 492)
❙
Automatic Brake Hold Button
(P 577)
❙
Shift Lever
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
*
(P 482, 484)
Automatic Transmission
*
(P 475)
Manual Transmission
*
(P 488)
❙
Electric Parking Brake Switch
(P 465)
❙
SPORT Button
*
(P 491)
7
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Side Curtain Airbags
(P 57)
❙
Ceiling Light
(P 221)
❙
Grab Handle
❙
Coat Hook
(P 233)
❙
Seat Belts
(P 38)
❙
Map Lights
(P 222)
❙
Moonroof Switch
*
(P 189)
❙
Sunglasses Holder
(P 234)
❙
Sun Visors
❙
Vanity Mirrors
❙
Knee Airbags
(P 52)
❙
Front Seat
(P 210)
❙
Accessory Power
Socket
(P 228)
❙
Side Airbags
(P 55)
❙
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat)
(P 69)
❙
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat
(P 71)
❙
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat
(P 66)
❙
Rear Seats
(P 214)
❙
USB Ports
*
(P 246)
Canadian models
❙
USB Port
*
(P 246)
* Not available on all models
Visual Index
8
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Maintenance Under the Hood
(P 614)
❙
Windshield Wipers
(P 200, 639)
❙
Door Lock/Unlock Control
(P 169)
❙
Power Door Mirrors
(P 209)
❙
Headlights
(P 632)
❙
High-Mount Brake Light
(P 638)
❙
Emergency Trunk Opener
(P 182)
❙
Opening/Closing the Trunk
(P 180)
❙
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
(P 193, 633)
❙
Front Turn Signal Lights/Front Side Marker Lights
(P 193, 633)
❙
Fog Lights
*
(P 195, 633)
❙
Trunk Release Button
*
(P 181)
❙
Brake Lights
(P 634)
❙
Rear Side Marker Lights/Taillights
(P 634)
❙
Rear Turn Signal Lights
(P 634)
❙
Back-Up Lights
(P 636)
❙
How to Refuel
(P 598)
❙
Tires
(P 642, 665)
❙
Brake Lights
*
(P 636)
❙
Taillights
(P 636)
❙
Multi-View Rear Camera
(P 594)
❙
Rear License Plate Light
(P 638)
9
Quick Reference Guide
Eco Assist® System
(P 492)
Ambient Meter
● With SPORT mode
*
off, the color of the ambient
meter changes to green to indicate that the
vehicle is being driven in a fuel efficient manner.
ECON Button
(P 492)
Helps maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator
(P 97)
Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
The message is displayed for a few seconds when
the ECON button is pressed.
Ambient Meter
*2*1
*3
*4
*5
*1: Models without the adaptive damper system
*2: Models with the adaptive damper system
*3: Continuously variable transmission models
without SPORT mode
*4: Manual transmission models
*5: Automatic transmission/Continuously
variable transmission models with SPORT
mode
* Not available on all models
10
Quick Reference Guide
Safe Driving
(P 33)
Airbags
(P 45)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety
(P 61)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard
(P 75)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist
(P 37)
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts
(P 38)
● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
11
Quick Reference Guide
Instrument Panel
(P 77)
Indicators
(P 78)
/Driver Information Interface
(P 138)
/Gauges
(P 137)
/
Head-Up Display
*
(P 157)
Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
Driver Information Interface
Temperature Gauge
Tachometer
Head-Up Display
*
Immobilizer System Indicator/
Security System Alarm Indicator
Gear Position Indicator
*
/
Transmission System Indicator
*
Turbo Meter
*
M (sequential mode
*
/7-speed manual shift
mode
*
) Indicator
*
/Gear Selection Indicator
*
* Not available on all models
12
Quick Reference Guide
Controls
(P 163)
Clock
(P164)
a
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
b
Select Adjust Clock, then press .
c
Rotate to adjust the hours.
d
Press to switch to minute
adjustment.
e
Rotate to adjust the minutes.
f
Press to switch to Set.
g
Press to complete clock adjustment.
Models with color audio
To adjust time
To adjust date
a
Press , then select Settings.
b
Select System, then Day & Time.
c
Select Set Date & Time.
d
Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select OFF.
Models with Display Audio
e
Select Set Date or Set Time.
f
Adjust the dates, hours and minutes by
selecting / .
g
Select Save to set the date or time.
The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.
ENGINE START/STOP
Button
(P190)
Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.
3
4
Models with navigation system
13
Quick Reference Guide
Turn Signals
(P 193)
Lights
(P 193)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing
Wipers and Washers
(P 200)
*1:Models with automatic intermittent
wipers
*2:Models without automatic intermittent
wipers
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
(-: Low Sensitivity
*1
(- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps
*2
(+: High Sensitivity
*1
(+ : Higher speed, more sweeps
*2
MIST
OFF
AUTO
*1
: Wiper speed varies automatically
INT
*2
: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
AUTO should always be turned OFF before
the following situations in order to prevent
severe damage to the wiper system:
● Cleaning the windshield
● Driving through a car wash
● No rain
Steering Wheel
(P 207)
● To adjust, push the adjustment lever
down, adjust to the desired position, then
lock the lever back in place.
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
To lock
To adjust
14
Quick Reference Guide
Unlocking the Front Doors
from the Inside
(P 176)
● Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it at the same time.
● Unlocking and opening the driver’s door
from the inner handle unlocks all the
other doors.
Trunk
(P 180)
● Press the trunk opener on the driver’s
door to unlock and open the trunk.
● Press the trunk release button on the
remote to unlock and open the trunk.
● Press the trunk release button
*
on the
trunk lid to unlock and open the trunk.
Trunk Opener
Power Door Mirrors
(P 209)
● With the power mode is ON, move the
selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Power Windows
(P 186)
● With the power mode is ON, open and
close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger’s window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator on), each
passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Power Window
Lock Button
Window Switch
Indicator
15
Quick Reference Guide
Climate Control System
(P 239)
● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the button to defrost the windshield.
Driver’s Side Temperature
Control Dial
(Windshield Defroster) Button
SYNC (Synchronization) Button
AUTO Button
(on/off) Button
(Recirculation) Button
MODE Control Button
Fan Control Dial
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Passenger’s Side Temperature
Control Dial
Floor ventsDashboard vents
and back of the
center console
*
Dashboard and floor
vents, and back of
the center console
*
Floor and
defroster
vents
* Not available on all models
16
Quick Reference Guide
Features
(P 243)
Audio Remote Controls
(P 248)
● VOL
(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
● SOURCE Button
Press to change the audio mode:
FM1FM2AMUSB/iPodPandora®
Bluetooth® Audio.
● / (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Radio:
Press / to change the
preset station.
iPod, USB device, or Bluetooth® Audio:
Press / to skip to the
beginning of the next song or
return to the beginning of the
current song.
Models with color audio
/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
SOURCE Button
VOL
(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
● VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
● Left Selector Wheel
When selecting the audio mode
Press the (home) button, then roll up
or down to select Audio on the driver
information interface, and then press the
left selector wheel.
USB device:
Press and hold / to
change a folder.
Models with Display Audio
/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Left Selector
Wheel
VOL
(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
(home) Button
FM
AM
SiriusXM®
*
USB1
USB2
*
Bluetooth® Audio
Smartphone Connection
(Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)
Roll up or down: To cycle through the
audio modes, roll up or down and then
press the left selector wheel:
17
Quick Reference Guide
● / (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Radio:
Press / to change the
preset station.
iPod, USB device, Bluetooth® Audio or
Smartphone Connection:
Press / to skip to the
beginning of the next song or
return to the beginning of the
current song.
USB device:
Press and hold / to
change a folder.
* Not available on all models
18
Quick Reference Guide
Audio System
(P 252, 273)
(P 252)
Models with color audio
(Seek/Skip) Button
Selector Knob
(Day/Night) Button
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
RADIO Button
(Sound) Button
Preset Buttons (1-6)
(Seek/Skip) Button
MEDIA Button
MENU/CLOCK Button
(Phone) Button
(Back) Button
Audio/Information Screen
19
Quick Reference Guide
(Home) Button
(Audio) Button
(Back) Button
Audio/Information Screen
(P273)
For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual
Models with Display Audio
(Phone) Button
(Day/Night) Button
(Seek/Skip) Button
(Seek/Skip) Button
VOL/ (Volume/Power)
Knob
Selector Knob
SOURCE Button
(Clock) Button
*
/ (Map) Button
*
* Not available on all models
20
Quick Reference Guide
Driving
(P 453)
Gear Position Indicator
Shift
Button
Indicator
Manual Transmission
*
(P 488)
Automatic Transmission
*
(P 475)
● Always depress the brake pedal before selecting
(P or changing the gear position from (P.
● Select
(P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
● Gear selection
Gear Position Indicator
The gear position indicator and
the shift button indicator
indicate the current gear
selection.
21
Quick Reference Guide
Park
Press the
(P button.
Used when parking or before turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Pull back the
(R button.
Used when reversing.
Neutral
Press the
(N button.
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Press the
(D button.
●
Normal driving (gears change between 1st and 10th automatically)
●
Temporarily driving in the sequential mode
●
Driving in the sequential mode (when driving in SPORT mode)
* Not available on all models
22
Quick Reference Guide
M (sequential
mode)
Indicator
Gear Position Indicator
Shift Down
(-
Paddle Shifter
Shift Up
(+
Paddle Shifter
Paddle Shifters
(P480)
● Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual
transmission (1st through 10th). This is useful for engine braking.
When the transmission is in
(D
● The transmission will shift back
to automatic mode once the
system detects that the vehicle
is cruising.
When the transmission is in
(D with SPORT mode
● Holds the selected gear, and
the M (sequential mode)
indicator comes on.
● The gear selection is shown in
the instrument panel.
Gear Selection Indicator
23
Quick Reference Guide
M Indicator
Gear Selection
Indicator
Continuously Variable Transmission
*
(P 482, 484)
● Shift to
(P and depress the brake pedal when starting the
engine.
● Shifting
Park
Used when parking or starting
the engine.
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive (S)
*
● Used for better
acceleration.
● Used to increase
engine braking.
● Used when going up
or down hills.
Models without
paddle shifters
Models with
paddle shifters
Depress the brake pedal
and press the shift lever
release button to shift.
Press the shift lever
release button and shift.
Shift without pressing the
shift lever release button.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Drive
● Used for normal driving.
● On models with paddle
shifters, 7-speed mode can be
used temporarily.
● On models with paddle
shifters, 7-speed manual shift
mode can be used when
driving in SPORT mode.
Low
*
● Used to further increase
engine braking.
● Used when going up or
down hills.
Shift Down
(-
Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter
7-Speed Manual Shift
Mode
*
(P486)
● Allows you to manually shift
the transmission up or down
without removing your
hands from the steering
wheel.
When the shift lever is in (D
with SPORT mode
● Pulling a paddle shifter changes
the mode from continuously
variable transmission to 7-speed
manual shift mode.
● The M indicator and the
selected speed number are
displayed in the gear selection
indicator.
When the shift lever is in (D
● Pulling a paddle shifter
temporarily changes the mode
from continuously variable
transmission to 7-speed manual
shift mode. The selected speed
number is displayed in the gear
selection indicator.
Shift Lever
Release
Button
* Not available on all models
24
Quick Reference Guide
VSA® On and Off
(P 495)
● The Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To partially disable or fully restore VSA®
function, press and hold the button until
you hear a beep.
CMBS
TM
On and Off
(P 513)
● When a possible collision is likely
unavoidable, the CMBS
TM
can help you to
reduce the vehicle speed and the severity
of the collision.
● The CMBS
TM
is turned on every time you
start the engine.
● To turn the CMBS
TM
on or off, use the
safety support switch.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
(P 497)
● Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
● The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you start the engine.
● A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.
Refueling
(P 597)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Fuel tank capacity: 14.8 US gal (56 L)
a
Unlock the driver’s door
using the master door
lock switch.
2 Using the Master
Door Lock Switch
(P178)
b
Press on the edge of
the fuel fill door to
make it pop up slightly.
c
After refueling, wait
for about five seconds
before removing the
filler nozzle.
Wait for five seconds
25
Quick Reference Guide
Honda Sensing®
(P 507)
Honda Sensing® is a driver support system
which employs the use of two distinctly
different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor
located at the lower part of the front
bumper and a front sensor camera mounted
to the interior side of the windshield,
behind the rear view mirror.
Front Sensor
Camera
The camera is located
behind the rearview
mirror.
Radar Sensor
The radar sensor is at
the lower part of the
front bumper.
Collision Mitigation
Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
(P 510)
Can assist you when there is a possibility of
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The
CMBS
TM
is designed to alert you when a
potential collision is determined, as well as
to reduce your vehicle speed to help
minimize collision severity when a collision is
deemed unavoidable.
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
(P519)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a
set following interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected
vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and
stop your vehicle, without you having to keep
your foot on the brake or the accelerator.
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)
*
(P 535)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and
a set following interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours, without you
having to keep your foot on the brake or
the accelerator.
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS)
(P 550)
Provides steering input to help keep the
vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the
vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
* Not available on all models
26
Quick Reference Guide
Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM) System
(P 558)
Alerts and helps to assist you when the
system detects a possibility of your vehicle
unintentionally crossing over detected lane
markings and/or leaving the roadway
altogether.
Traffic Sign Recognition
System
(P562)
Reminds you of road sign information, such as
the current speed limit, your vehicle has just
passed through, showing it on the driver
information interface and the head-up
display
*
.
27
Quick Reference Guide
Maintenance
(P 603)
Under the Hood
(P 614)
● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid and clutch
*
fluid.
● Check the battery condition monthly.
a
Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
b
Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then
raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you
can release the lever.
c
When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
Lights
(P 631)
● Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades
(P 639)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
Tires
(P 642)
● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.
* Not available on all models
28
Quick Reference Guide
Handling the Unexpected
(P 663)
Flat Tire
(P 665)
● Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
trunk.
Indicators Come On
(P 681)
● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner’s manual.
Engine Won’t Start
(P 671)
● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
Blown Fuse
(P 688)
● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
Overheating
(P 679)
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing
(P 693)
● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
29
Quick Reference Guide
What to Do If
The power mode does not
change from VEHICLE OFF
to ACCESSORY. Why?
●
The steering wheel may be locked.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right after
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.
The power mode does not
change from ACCESSORY
to VEHICLE OFF. Why?
The shift lever should be moved to
(P
.
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P581)
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission
models for Canadian models
Continuously variable transmission
models
30
Quick Reference Guide
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in the
lock position. If so, open the rear door
with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, slide the lever
up to the unlock position.
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver’s door?
The beeper sounds when:
●
The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
●
The exterior lights are left on.
Why does a beeper sound
when I walk away from the
vehicle after I close the
door?
The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto
door lock operating range before the door completely closes.
2 Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock®) (P171)
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are
not wearing their seat belts.
31
Quick Reference Guide
I’m seeing an amber
indicator of a tire with an
exclamation point. What is
that?
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If
you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate
the system.
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P497)
Pressing the electric
parking brake switch does
not release the parking
brake. Why?
Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
Depressing the accelerator
pedal does not release the
parking brake
automatically. Why?
●
Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
●
Check if the transmission is in
(P
*
or
(N
. If so, select any other
position.
Why does the gear position
automatically change to
(P
when I open the driver’s
door to check for parking
space lines when
reversing?
●
Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
●
Close the driver’s door and manually change the gear
position.
2 When opening the driver’s door (P477)
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Models with electronic gear selector
* Not available on all models
32
33
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions.............. 34
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 36
Safety Checklist ................................. 37
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts ........................ 38
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 41
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 44
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 45
Types of Airbags ................................ 48
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 48
Knee Airbags ..................................... 52
Side Airbags....................................... 55
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 57
Airbag System Indicators.................... 58
Airbag Care ....................................... 60
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 61
Safety of Infants and Small Children...... 63
Safety of Larger Children ................... 73
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 75
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 76
34
Safe Driving
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■ Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■ Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
35
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Safe Driving
■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
■ Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
Children, pets and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be
injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the
vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be
injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of
the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death.
Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended
as the climate control system can shut off at any time.
36
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
Safe Driving
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
Crush Zones
6
7
9
10
11
12
Safety Cage
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Side Airbags
Seat Belt Tensioners
7
7
9
9
8
10 10
11
6
11
12
8
Knee Airbags
8
37
uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist
Safe Driving
Safety Checklist
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 176
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 210
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer
*
Head Restraint Positions P. 216
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 41
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 61
1Safety Checklist
If the door and/or trunk open message appears on
the driver information interface, a door and/or the
trunk is not completely closed. Close all doors and
the trunk tightly until the message disappears.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages P. 105
* Not available on all models
38
Safe Driving
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers
■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body.
The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 69
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in
place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt,
then extend it slowly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
3
WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Continued
39
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
■ Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
The seat belt system includes an indicator on
the instrument panel to remind the driver or a
front passenger or both to fasten their seat
belts.
If you set the power mode to ON and a seat
belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and
the indicator will blink. After a few seconds,
the beeper will stop and the indicator will
come on and remain illuminated until the seat
belt is fastened.
The beeper will periodically sound and the
indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving
until the seat belt is fastened.
■
Seat Belt Reminder
1About Your Seat Belts
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the power mode is set to ON.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound.
The indicator also may not come on and the beeper
may not sound when the occupant is not heavy
enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants
(e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved
to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will
injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 61
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
40
Safe Driving
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-
severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags or the knee airbags.
■
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
41
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Continued
Safe Driving
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 210
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
42
Safe Driving
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and
then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly
stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing
door.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
Lap belt
as low as
possible
■
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
Push
43
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
■
Advice for Pregnant Women
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
•
When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
•
When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
44
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract
easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3
WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
45
Continued
Safe Driving
Airbags
Airbag System Components
6
7
8
9
10
9
9
9
6
9 911
12
46
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
The front, front knee, front side, and side
curtain airbags are deployed according to
the direction and severity of impact. Both
side curtain airbags are deployed in a
rollover. The airbag system includes:
a
Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
b
Two knee airbags. The driver’s knee
airbag is stored under the steering
column; the front passenger’s knee
airbag is stored under the glove box.
Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
c
Two side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
d
Two side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
e
An electronic control unit that, when the
power mode is in ON, continually
monitors information about the various
impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors,
rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat
belt tensioners, and other vehicle
information. During a crash event the
unit can record such information.
f
Automatic front seat belt tensioners. In
addition, the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate
sensors that detect whether or not the
belts are fastened.
g
A driver’s seat position sensor. This
sensor determines the optimal force at
which the airbag will deploy in a crash.
h
Weight sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is
approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the
weight of an infant or small child).
i
Impact sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
j
An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
you that the front passenger’s front
airbag has been turned off.
k
An indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
l
A rollover sensor that can detect if your
vehicle is about to roll over and signal the
control unit to deploy both side curtain
airbags.
47
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front and front knee airbag covers.
Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the
airbags inflate.
■
Important Facts About Your Airbags
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
48
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe Driving
Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with four types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
• Front knee airbags: Airbags under the steering column and under the glove
box.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
■
Housing Locations
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is
in ON.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
Continued
49
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
■
Operation
■
How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
50
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
■ When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help to save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might
occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help to reduce
the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle
is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front
airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide
little if any protection.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
51
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related
injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a
seat position sensor.
Based on information from this sensor and the
severity of the impact, the advanced airbag
system determines the optimal deployment of
the driver’s airbag.
The front passenger’s advanced airbag system
has weight sensors.
We advise against allowing a child age 12 or
under to ride in the front passenger’s seat.
However, if you do allow a child age 12 or
under to ride in the front passenger’s
seat, note that the system will automatically
turn off the front passenger’s airbag if the
sensors detect that the child is approximately
65 lbs (29 kg) or less.
■
Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the
event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of
the driver’s seating position) with a force
corresponding to the severity of the impact.
For the advanced airbags to work properly:
•
Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
•
Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
•
Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
•
All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
•
Do not cover the passenger’s side dashboard with
a cloth, towel, cover, etc.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 59
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors
52
uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags
Safe Driving
Knee Airbags
The knee SRS airbags inflates in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help keep
the driver and/or front passenger in the proper position and to help maximize the
benefit provided by the vehicle’s other safety features.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
The driver’s knee airbag is housed under the
steering column.
The front passenger’s knee airbag is housed
under the glove box.
Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
■
Housing Locations
1Knee Airbags
Do not attach accessories on or near the knee
airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
The driver and front passenger should not store any
items under the seat or behind their feet. The items
can interfere with proper airbag deployment in the
event of a moderate to sever frontal collision and may
result in inadequate protection.
Housing
Location
Housing
Location
53
uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
When the front airbags inflate, the knee
airbags also inflate.
Even if the collision is not severe enough to
deploy the front airbags, the knee airbags may
inflate alone.
■
Operation
When
inflated
Knee
Airbag
When
inflated
Knee
Airbag
54
uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags
Safe Driving
■ When knee airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When knee airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
55
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-
backs.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
Housing
Location
■
Operation
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
56
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the
far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed
most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been
needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
57
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the
outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain
airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of
partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes,
particularly rollover crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there
are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■
Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
58
Safe Driving
■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled
frontal collision.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the Driver information interface.
■ When the power mode is set to ON
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
■
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3
WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
59
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
■ When the passenger airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the weight sensors detect
about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an
infant or small child, on the seat.
Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 61
If the front passenger’s seat is empty, the indicator will come on and, in the event of
a crash, the front passenger’s airbag will not deploy. The front passenger’s knee
airbag will not deploy either.
■
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm
that:
•
There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat-back.
•
There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger’s seat.
•
The front seat or seat-back is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
•
There is no object placed under or beside the front
passenger’s seat.
•
The occupant is sitting in an upright position and
the seat back is not excessively reclined.
•
The occupant is not leaning against the door or
center console.
•
The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front
of them.
•
There are no objects hanging from the front
passenger’s seat.
•
Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back
pocket.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as
possible if:
•
All of the above conditions are met, and the
indicator comes on with an adult seated in the
front passenger seat.
•
The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front
seat when the indicator is on.
U.S. Canada
60
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Safe Driving
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position
sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or
modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda
dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at
1-800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at
1-888-9-HONDA-9.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
61
Continued
Safe Driving
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver’s ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.
3
WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
62
Safe Driving
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat
belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 76
3
WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
63
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Continued
Safe Driving
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the
infant is at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat
and the seat in front of it.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 45
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
■
Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and
weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat
installed in a rear seating position:
The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly
detect the actual weight of the occupant.
3
WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
64
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and has exceeded the weight and height limitations
of a rearward facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly
secured forward facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations
for the forward facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
■
Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
3
WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
Continued
65
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates
as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing
your child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
■
Selecting a Child Seat
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
66
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child
seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
1. Locate the anchor marks affixed to the base
of the seat cushion.
2. Pull out the anchor covers under the marks
to expose the lower anchors.
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
■
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child
seat that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
3
WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same
anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not
be strong enough to hold two child seat
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
Marks
Covers
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
Flexible Type
67
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Continued
Safe Driving
4. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
5. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Anchor
Tether Strap
Hook
Straight top tether type in seat
position with adjustable headrest
Seat position with adjustable headrest
Anchor
Tether Strap
Hook
Other top tether type in seat
position with adjustable headrest
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
68
Safe Driving
5. Route the tether strap over the top of the
head restraint and secure the tether strap
hook to the anchor.
5. Route the tether strap over the side of the
head restraint and secure the tether strap
hook to the anchor.
6. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the
rear center seat
Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower
anchors which are used to secure a LATCH-
compatible child seat. The rear center seat, however,
is not equipped with anchors of any kind. The inner
and outer anchors are spaced apart at a standard
distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance
between the two inner anchors is 15.4 inches (390
mm).
LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted
with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the
rear center seat. However, a system fitted with
flexible-type attachments can be installed in the
center seat, provided that the manufacturer’s
instructions for that system permit the use of the
inner anchors with the stated spacing.
Before seating a child, make sure that the system is
properly attached to both the lower anchors and
tether anchors.
3
WARNING
Do not use the lower inner anchors of the
outer rear seats to secure a LATCH-
compatible child seat to the rear center
seat, unless the manufacturer’s instructions
for that system permit the use of inner
anchors with the stated spacing.
Anchor
Tether Strap
Hook
Straight top tether type in seat
position with fixed headrest
Straight top tether type in seat position
with fixed headrest
Anchor
Tether Strap
Hook
Other top tether type in seat
position with fixed headrest
Other top tether type in seat position
with fixed headrest
All models
Continued
69
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely
necessary, the front passenger seat.
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and
check that the retractor has switched
modes by pulling on the webbing. It should
not pull out again until it is reset by
removing the latch plate from the buckle.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the
way out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.
■
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
70
Safe Driving
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; less than one inch of movement
should occur near the seat belt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
Continued
71
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each rear seating position. If you have a child
seat that comes with a tether but can be
installed with a seat belt, the tether may be
used for additional security.
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage
point and lift the cover.
2. Route the tether strap over the head
restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
■
Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether
Always use a tether for forward facing child seats
when using the seat belt or lower anchors.
Tether Anchorage Points
Cover
Anchor
Anchor
Tether Strap
Hook
Straight top tether type in seat
position with adjustable headrest
Anchor
Tether Strap
Hook
Other top tether type in seat
position with adjustable headrest
72
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
3. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Anchor
Tether Strap
Hook
Straight top tether type in seat
position with fixed headrest
Anchor
Tether Strap
Hook
Other top tether type in seat
position with fixed headrest
73
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Continued
Safe Driving
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child’s neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
■
Protecting Larger Children
■
Checking Seat Belt Fit
1Safety of Larger Children
3
WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
74
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
the rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that
the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
■
Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■
Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
75
Safe Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
76
Safe Driving
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
Sun Visor
U.S. models
Canadian models
Radiator Cap
U.S. models only
Dashboard
U.S. models
Canadian models
Air Conditioner System
77
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 78
Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages.................... 105
Gauges and Displays
Gauges............................................ 137
Driver Information Interface ............. 138
Head-Up Display
*
............................ 157
* Not available on all models
78
Instrument Panel
Indicators
M (sequential mode
*
/
7-speed manual shift
mode
*
) Indicator
*
/
Gear Selection
Indicator
*
P. 84
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
Automatic Brake
Hold System Indicator
Automatic Brake Hold
Indicator
U.S.
Canada
*1: When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the engine
has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in the
owner's manual.
P. 79
*1
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Charging System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
®
(VSA
®
) System Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
®
(VSA
®
) OFF Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
Indicator
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) System Indicator
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning Indicators
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
*
ECON Mode Indicator
System Message Indicator
SPORT Mode Indicator
*
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) Indicator
(Amber)
*
/Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Indicator
(Amber)
*
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS) Indicator
(Amber)
Safety Support Indicator
(Amber)
Safety Support Indicator
(Green/Gray)
P. 80
P. 82
P. 82
P. 83
P. 84
*1
*1
*1
*1
P. 93
*1
*1
Gear Position Indicator
*
P. 84
Transmission System
Indicator
*
P. 85, 87
Shift Up Indicator
*
P. 88
Shift Down Indicator
*
P. 88
P. 89
P. 89
P. 90
P. 90
P. 90
P. 91
*1
*1
*1
*1
P. 92
*1
P. 92
P. 94
P. 99
*1
P. 94
P. 94
P. 97
P. 94
Immobilizer System
Indicator
P. 95
Security System Alarm
Indicator
P. 96
P. 96
P. 98
P. 100
P. 101
P. 104
*1
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) Indicator
(Green)
*
/Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Indicator
(Green)
*
P. 100
*1
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS) Indicator
(Green)
P. 100
*1
* Not available on all models
79
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator (Red)
• Comes on when the parking brake
is applied, and goes off when it is
released.
• Comes on when the brake fluid
level is low.
• Comes on if there is a problem with
the brake system.
• The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if you drive with
the parking brake not fully released.
• Comes on for about 30 seconds
when you pull or push the electric
parking brake switch when the
power mode is in ACCESSORY or
VEHICLE OFF.
• Stays on for about 30 seconds
when you set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF while the electric
parking brake is set.
• Comes on while driving - Make sure
the parking brake is released. Check the
brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator
comes on while driving P. 683
• Comes on along with the brake system
indicator (amber) -Immediately stop in a
safe place. Contact a dealer for repair. The
brake pedal becomes harder to operate.
Depress the pedal further than you
normally do.
• Comes on along with the ABS
indicator - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On or Blinks P. 683
• Blinks and the brake system indicator
(amber) comes on at the same time -
There is a problem with the electric
parking brake system. The parking brake
may not be set.
Avoid using the parking brake and have
your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time
When the Brake System Indicator
(Amber) Comes On P. 684
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
80
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator
(Amber)
• Comes on if there is a problem with
a system related to braking other
than the conventional brake
system.
• Comes on if there is a problem with
the electric parking brake system.
• Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
• Comes on while driving - Avoid using
the parking brake and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
U.S.
Canada
81
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator
(Amber)
• Comes on if there is a problem with
the automatic brake hold system.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 577
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the radar sensor.
●
Indicator may come on temporarily
when the Maximum Load Limit is
exceeded.
●
Make sure the total load is within the
Maximum Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 457
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
—
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
U.S.
Canada
82
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Automatic
Brake Hold
System
Indicator
●
Comes on when the automatic
brake hold system is on.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 577
Automatic
Brake Hold
Indicator
●
Comes on when the automatic
brake hold is activated.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 577
—
U.S.
Canada
83
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
• After you have set the power mode
to ON, the vehicle performs system
checks. However, if the readiness
codes have not been set by that
time, this indicator will blink five
times and then go off.
• Comes on if there is a problem with
the emissions control system.
• Blinks when a misfire in the
engine’s cylinders is detected.
• Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control
systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 707
• Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
• Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place where there are no flammable
objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes or
more, and wait for it to cool down. Then,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 682
84
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Charging
System
Indicator
• Comes on when the battery is not
charging.
• Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 681
Gear Position
Indicator
*
• Indicates the current gear selection.
2 Shifting P. 475, 482, 484
—
M (sequential
mode
*
/7-speed
manual shift
mode
*
)
Indicator
*
/Gear
Selection
Indicator
*
• Comes on when the sequential
mode
*
/7-speed manual shift mode
*
is applied.
2 Sequential Mode P. 480
2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 486
—
* Not available on all models
85
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Transmission
System
Indicator
• The current gear selection blinks if
the transmission system has a
problem.
• Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
starts and acceleration and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
• The indicated current gear selection
blinks if you cannot put the
transmission into
(R due to a
transmission system failure.
• Avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration
and high speed, and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
• The indicated current gear selection
blinks if the transmission system has
a problem and the performance of
the vehicle is reduced.
• Avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration
and high speed, and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
• The indicated current gear selection
blinks if the transmission system has
a problem and the paddle shifters
cannot be used.
• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
Automatic transmission models
86
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Transmission
System
Indicator
• The current gear position or all the
gear positions blink if there is a
problem with the transmission and
the vehicle is no longer able to run.
• Immediately park your car in a safe place.
2 Emergency Towing P. 693
• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
• The current gear position or all the
gear positions blink if there is a
problem with the transmission and
it is not possible to select
(P.
• Depending on the circumstances, you can
set the power mode to ON as an
emergency measure.
2 If the Transmission Indicator Blinks
along with the Warning Message
P. 687
• While the vehicle is stopped, apply the
parking brake.
• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
Automatic transmission models
87
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Transmission
System
Indicator
●
Blinks if the transmission system has
a problem.
●
Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
starts and acceleration and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
●
Blinks if the transmission system has
a problem and the performance of
the vehicle is reduced.
●
Avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration
and high speed, and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
●
Blinks if the transmission system has
a problem and the paddle shifters
cannot be used.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
Continuously variable transmission models
Models with paddle shifters
89
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
• Blinks and the beeper sounds for a
few seconds if you are not wearing
a seat belt when you set the power
mode to ON, then the indicator
comes on.
• If the front passenger is not
wearing a seat belt, the indicator
comes on a few seconds later.
• Blinks while driving if either you
and/or the front passenger has not
fastened a seat belt. The beeper
sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.
• The beeper stops and the indicator goes
off when you and the front passenger
fasten their seat belts.
• Stays on after you and/or the front
passenger has fastened the seat
belt(s) - A detection error may have
occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 39
Low Fuel
Indicator
• Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately
2.2 U.S. gal./8.4 L left).
• Blinks if there is a problem with the
fuel gauge.
• Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon
as possible.
• Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
90
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
• Comes on if there is a problem with
the ABS.
• Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. With this indicator
on, your vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 581
Supplemental
Restraint
System
Indicator
• Comes on if a problem with any of
the following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Knee airbag system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
• Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Auto High-
Beam Indicator
• Comes on when all the operating
conditions of the auto high-beam
are met.
2 Auto High-Beam P. 197
—
91
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Vehicle Stability
Assist® (VSA®)
System
Indicator
●
Blinks when VSA® is active.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the brake assist system, VSA®
system or hill start assist system.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
System P. 494
●
Comes on if the VSA® system is
deactivated temporarily after the
battery has been disconnected, then
re-connected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph
(20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it
does not, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
92
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Vehicle Stability
Assist® (VSA®)
OFF Indicator
●
Comes on when you partially
disable VSA®.
2 VSA® On and Off P. 495
●
Comes on if the VSA® system is
deactivated temporarily after the
battery has been disconnected, then
re-connected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph
(20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it
does not, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System
Indicator
• Comes on if there is a problem with
the EPS system.
• Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System Indicator Comes On P. 685
93
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Low Tire
Pressure/TPMS
Indicator
●
May come on briefly if the power
mode is set to ON and the vehicle is
not moved within 45 seconds, to
indicate the calibration process is
not yet complete.
●
Comes on and stays on when:
- One or more tires’ pressures are
determined to be significantly low.
- The system has not been
calibrated.
●
Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe
place, check tire pressures, and inflate the
tire(s) if necessary.
●
Stays on after the tires are inflated to
the recommended pressures - The
system needs to be calibrated.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 497
●
Blinks for about one minute, and
then stays on if there is a problem
with the TPMS, or when a compact
spare tire is temporarily installed.
●
Blinks and remains on - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle
is fitted with a compact spare, get your
regular tire repaired or replaced and put
back on your vehicle as soon as you can.
●
Comes on if the TPMS is deactivated
temporarily after the battery has
been disconnected, then re-
connected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph
(20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it
does not, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
94
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Turn Signal and
Hazard
Warning
Indicators
• Blinks when you operate the turn
signal lever.
• Blink along with all turn signals if
you press the hazard warning
button.
• Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A
turn signal light bulb has blown. Change
the bulb immediately.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 633, 634
—
High Beam
Indicator
• Comes on when the high beam
headlights are on.
— —
Lights On
Indicator
• Comes on whenever the light
switch is on, or in AUTO when the
exterior lights are on.
• If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
while the lights are on, a chime sounds
when the driver’s door is opened.
—
Fog Light
Indicator
*
• Comes on when the fog lights are
on.
— —
* Not available on all models
95
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before selecting the ON mode.
*2:Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models for Canadian models
*3:Manual transmission models for Canadian models
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Immobilizer
System
Indicator
• Blinks if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key
information.
• Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set
the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
*1
, then
select the ON mode again.
• Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
• Do not attempt to alter this system or add
other devices to it. Electrical problems can
occur.
Indicator
*2
*2
*3
*3
96
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Security System
Alarm Indicator
• Blinks when the security system
alarm has been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 184
—
System
Message
Indicator
• Comes on along with a beep when
a problem is detected. A system
message on the driver information
interface appears at the same time.
• While the indicator is on, press the
(home) button to see the message again.
2 Accessing contents in the main
display P. 138
• Refer to the Indicators information in this
chapter when a system message appears
on the driver information interface. Take
the appropriate action for the message.
• The driver information interface does not
return to the normal screen unless the
warning is canceled, or the left selector
wheel is pressed.
—
Indicator
98
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models without the adaptive damper system
*2:Models with the adaptive damper system
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
SPORT Mode
Indicator
*
• Comes on when you press the
SPORT button.
• The ambient meter remains lit up in
red as long as SPORT mode is on.
2 SPORT Mode
*
P. 491
*1
*2
* Not available on all models
99
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Adaptive
Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low
Speed Follow
(LSF) Indicator
(Amber)
*
/
Adaptive
Cruise Control
(ACC) Indicator
(Amber)
*
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●
Comes on if the ACC with LSF
*
/
ACC
*
is deactivated temporarily
after the battery has been
disconnected, then re-connected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph
(20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it
does not, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
●
Indicator may come on temporarily
when the Maximum Load Limit is
exceeded.
●
ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
has been
automatically canceled.
●
Make sure the total load is within the
Maximum Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 457
—
* Not available on all models
100
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Adaptive
Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low
Speed Follow
(LSF) Indicator
(Green)
*
/
Adaptive
Cruise Control
(ACC) Indicator
(Green)
*
●
Comes on when you press the
MAIN button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
—
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS)
Indicator
(Amber)
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the LKAS.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS)
Indicator
(Green)
●
Comes on when you press the
MAIN button.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
P. 550
—
* Not available on all models
101
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Safety Support
Indicator
(Amber)
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
RDM, CMBS
TM
, or the blind spot
information system
*
.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●
Comes on if the RDM and CMBS
TM
are deactivated temporarily after
the battery has been disconnected
and then re-connected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph
(20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it
does not, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
* Not available on all models
102
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Safety Support
Indicator
(Amber)
●
Comes on when RDM and/or
CMBS
TM
shuts itself off.
●
Indicator may come on temporarily when
passing through an enclosed space, such
as tunnel.
●
The area around the radar sensor is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris
off with a soft cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator does not go off even after
you have cleaned the radar sensor.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking
System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 510
●
Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high.
Use the climate control system to cool
down the camera.
The system activates when the
temperature inside the camera cools
down.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 568
* Not available on all models
103
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Safety Support
Indicator
(Amber)
●
Comes on when RDM and/or
CMBS
TM
shuts itself off.
●
Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris
off with a soft cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator and message are still
displayed even after you have cleaned the
area around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 568
●
Comes on when mud, snow, or ice
has accumulated in the vicinity of
the blind spot information system
sensor.
●
Comes on while driving - Something
may be interfering with the blind spot
information system sensor. Check the
vicinity of the blind spot information
system sensor and remove any obstacles.
2 Blind spot information System
*
P. 502
●
Indicator may come on temporarily
when the Maximum Load Limit is
exceeded.
●
Make sure the total load is within the
Maximum Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 457
—
Models with the blind spot
information system
* Not available on all models
104
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Safety Support
Indicator
(Green/Gray)
●
Lights up in green when RDM,
CMBS
TM
, and the blind spot
information system
*
are on.
●
Lights up in green and gray when
RDM, CMBS
TM
, or the blind spot
information system
*
, or any two of
these systems are off.
●
Lights up in gray when RDM,
CMBS
TM
, and the blind spot
information system
*
are off.
2 RDM On and Off P. 560
2 CMBS
TM
On and Off P. 513
2 Blind spot information System On
and Off P. 504
* Not available on all models
105
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the (home) button, select Warnings, then press the left
selector wheel to see the message again with the system message indicator on.
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the vehicle is no longer able to run
due to a malfunction.
●
Immediately stop in a safe place.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
●
Appears when there is a risk that the vehicle will
move unexpectedly after you have stopped due to a
malfunction with the vehicle.
●
While the vehicle is stopped, apply the parking brake.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears when you set the power mode to ON again
and the vehicle is able to run.
2 Starting the Engine P. 465
Automatic transmission models
106
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears if any door or the trunk is not completely
closed.
• Appears if any door or the trunk is opened while
driving. The beeper sounds.
• Disappears when all doors and the trunk are closed.
• Appears when the engine oil pressure is low. • Appears while driving - Immediately stop in a safe
place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears P. 681
107
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears if there is a problem with the shutter grille,
and the radiator coolant temperature is too high.
• Power output will be reduced, so you may not be able
to accelerate or maintain your current speed. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears when the washer fluid is low.
●
Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 630
●
Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due
soon.
●
Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and
Maintenance Past Due follow.
2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver
Information Interface P. 609
●
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Checking the Battery P. 651
●
Appears along with the battery charging system
indicator when the battery is not charging.
●
Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger to
reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 681
Models with shutter grille
Canadian models
108
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
abnormally high.
2 Overheating P. 679
●
Appears if the automatic brake hold is automatically
canceled while it is in operation.
●
Immediately depress the brake pedal.
Automatic transmission/
Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission
models
109
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the automatic brake hold system is
turned off.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 577
●
Appears when the automatic brake hold button is
pressed without wearing the driver’s seat belt.
●
Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 577
110
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the automatic brake hold button is
pressed without depressing the brake pedal while
the automatic brake hold is in operation.
●
Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 577
●
Appears when the parking brake is applied
automatically while it is in operation.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 577
2 Parking Brake P. 571
Automatic transmission/
Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission
models
111
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the electric parking brake switch is
pressed without depressing the brake pedal while
the electric parking brake is in operation.
●
Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake
pedal depressed.
2 Parking Brake P. 571
Automatic transmission/
Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission
models
112
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears after you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or ON.
●
Appears after you unlock and open the driver’s
door.
2 Starting the Engine P. 465
●
Appears when the steering wheel is locked.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
Automatic transmission/
Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission
models
Canadian models
Continuously variable transmission models
for Canadian models
Manual transmission models
113
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
—
●
Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the
power mode is in ACCESSORY.
●
Change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button P. 190
●
Appears when you close the door with the power
mode in ON without the remote inside the vehicle.
●
Disappears when you bring the remote back inside the
vehicle and close the door.
2 Remote Reminder P. 192
●
Appears when the remote battery becomes weak.
●
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 653
114
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears if you try to start the engine when the
transmission is in (N and the parking brake is
disengaged.
●
Put the transmission into (P, then start the engine in
the normal procedure.
2 Starting the Engine P. 465
●
Appears when the parking brake is disengaged while
the power mode is in ON.
●
Set the parking brake, then start the engine in the
normal procedure.
2 Parking Brake P. 571
2 Starting the Engine P. 465
Automatic transmission
models
Continuously variable
transmission models
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission models
115
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears if the remote battery is too weak to start the
engine or the key is not within operating range to
start the engine.
A beeper sounds six times.
●
Bring the remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP
button to be touched with.
2 If the Remote Battery is Weak P. 672
●
Appears when the starter system has a problem.
●
As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while
pressing the brake pedal and clutch pedal (manual
transmission only), manually start the engine.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the
smart entry system
*
or push button starting system.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
U.S.
Canada
* Not available on all models
116
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while the vehicle is moving.
• The message will disappear after six seconds or when
the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
• Appears if the vehicle is being driven in a manner
consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving.
2 Driver Attention Monitor P. 152
117
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears when the temperature of the transmission
is starting to get too hot.
• The performance of the vehicle may be reduced.
• Until the message disappears, reduce your speed and
allow the system to cool down.
• Appears when you attempt to change to another
gear position with the transmission in
(P and the
engine OFF.
• To select another gear position while in (P, the engine
must be ON.
• Appears when you set the power mode to OFF while
driving.
• Immediately stop in a safe place, set the parking brake,
then restart the engine. If the message disappears,
continue driving.
Automatic transmission models
118
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears if the vehicle is stopped and the driver’s seat
belt is unfastened, as there is a possibility that the
vehicle may roll.
• When the vehicle is idling or when you are parking or
exiting the vehicle, put the transmission into (P before
releasing the brake pedal.
2 Shift Operation P. 476
• Appears when you put the transmission into (N,
then release the
(N button.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N
position [car wash mode] P. 478
• Appears when car wash mode is not available due to
the transmission being too hot.
• When the transmission is too hot, car wash mode may
not be available. Let the engine idle until the
transmission has cooled down.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N
position [car wash mode] P. 478
Automatic transmission models
119
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears when you try to change the gear position
without releasing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
• Release your foot off the accelerator pedal, then select
a shift button.
• Appears when the (P button is pressed while the
vehicle is moving.
• Appears if you put the transmission into
(R while
the vehicle is moving forward, or into (D while the
vehicle is reversing.
• Make sure that the vehicle comes to a stop before
operating the select button.
• Appears when you set the power mode to ON
without fastening the driver’s seat belt.
• Appears when you change the gear position after
(P has been automatically selected with the driver’s
door open, the driver’s seat belt unfastened, then
the brake pedal is released.
• Fasten the seat belt properly before you start to drive.
2 Shift Operation P. 476
• Appears when you try to change the gear position
without depressing the brake pedal.
• Depress the brake pedal, then select a shift button.
Automatic transmission models
120
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears if you depress the accelerator pedal when
the transmission is in (N.
• Release the accelerator pedal. After that, depress the
brake pedal and change the transmission position.
●
Appears when the shift is repeatedly changed
between
(P and any other position.
●
Wait for a while then change the gear position.
• Appears when you try to take the transmission out
of (P immediately after you start engine.
• Try to take the transmission out of (P again.
Automatic transmission models
121
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears when you press and hold (N button for
more than two seconds.
• Disappears when you set the gear position to a gear
other than (N.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N
position [car wash mode] P. 478
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP
button to turn the engine off without the shift lever
in
(P.
●
Move the shift lever to (P. The power mode changes to
VEHICLE OFF.
●
Move the shift lever to (P, then press the ENGINE
START/STOP button twice.
Automatic transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
U.S. models
Canadian models
122
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears if there is a problem with the automatic
lighting control system.
• Appears while driving - Manually turn the lights on,
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
• Appears if there is a problem with the headlights. • Appears while driving - The headlights may not be
on. When conditions allow you to drive safety, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
• Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor
system.
• Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with
mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on or the
beeper does not stop even after you clean the area,
have the system checked by a dealer.
• Appears if there are obstacles around the sensors.
• Check for obstacles near your vehicle to make sure it is
safe to park.
Models with parking sensor system
Models with parking sensor system
123
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
• Appears if there is a problem with the auto high-
beam.
• Manually operate the headlight switch.
• If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when
this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.
●
Appears when ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
has been
automatically canceled.
●
You can resume the set speed after the condition that
caused ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
to cancel improves. Press
the RES/+ button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
●
Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with
a vehicle in front of you.
●
Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply
the brakes, change lanes, etc.)
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
P. 510
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
* Not available on all models
124
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
is canceled due
to excessive high vehicle speed.
●
Reduce the speed, then reset ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
●
Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too high for
you to set ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
.
●
Reduce the speed, then set ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
●
Appears when ACC is canceled due to excessive low
vehicle speed.
●
Raise the speed, then reset ACC.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
●
Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too low for
you to set ACC.
●
Raise the speed, then set ACC.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
Manual transmission models
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
125
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead of you is too close while ACC
with LSF
*
/ACC
*
is in operation.
●
ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
●
Appears when pressing the SET/– button while the
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you is too close.
●
ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
●
Appears when the parking brake is applied
automatically while ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
is in
operation.
●
ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
2 Parking Brake P. 571
●
Appears when pressing the SET/– button while the
parking brake is applied.
●
ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
2 Parking Brake P. 571
* Not available on all models
126
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when pressing the SET/– button while the
vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is depressed.
●
ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
Automatic
transmission/
Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission
models
* Not available on all models
127
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears just before the ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
is
automatically canceled when you are descending a
long hill etc (The following interval is automatically
set to extra long).
●
Appears when the ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
has been
automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
●
Appears when you are descending a long hill etc and
you press the RES/+ or SET/– button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
* Not available on all models
128
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the driver’s seat belt is unfastened
while your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC
with LSF.
●
ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
●
Appears when pressing the SET/– button while the
driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
●
ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
Models with ACC with LSF
* Not available on all models
129
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the transmission is put into any
position other than (D or (S
*
while ACC with LSF is
in operation.
●
ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
Models with ACC with LSF
Automatic transmission
models
Continuously variable
transmission models
* Not available on all models
130
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when pressing the SET/– button while the
transmission is in any position other than (D or (S
*
.
●
ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
Models with ACC with LSF
Automatic transmission
models
Continuously variable
transmission models
* Not available on all models
131
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the vehicle is stopped on a very steep
slope while ACC with LSF is in operation.
●
ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
●
Appears when pressing the SET/– button while the
vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
●
ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
Models with ACC with LSF
* Not available on all models
132
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears if ACC with LSF is canceled while your
vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC with LSF.
●
Immediately depress the brake pedal.
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when pressing the SET/– button while the
vehicle is moving and the clutch pedal is depressed.
●
ACC cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
●
Appears when the clutch pedal is depressed while
ACC is in operation.
●
ACC has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
Models with ACC with LSF
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
133
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover
and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in
front.
●
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,
snow, fog, etc.).
●
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a
safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message
does not disappear even after you clean the sensor
cover.
2 Radar Sensor P. 570
●
Appears if the temperature inside the front sensor
camera is too high and some driver assist systems
and auto high-beam cannot be activated.
●
Use the climate control system to cool down the
camera.
●
Disappears - The camera has been cooled down and
the systems are activated normally.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 568
2 Auto High-Beam P. 197
●
Appears if the area around the front sensor camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. and be prevented from
detecting a vehicle in front.
●
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,
snow, fog, etc.).
●
When the front window gets dirty, stop your vehicle in
a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message
does not disappear even after you cleaned the area
around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 568
2 Auto High-Beam P. 197
134
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
lane. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.
●
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 550
●
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
lane.
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane. The system
also steers the vehicle to help you remain within
your driving lane.
●
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 558
●
You can change the setting for the road departure
mitigation system. Narrow, Normal, Wide, and
Warning Only can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
●
Appears when the vehicle is likely to drive out of a
detected lane.
The RDM system also steers the vehicle to help you
remain within your driving lane.
—
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
When you selected Warning Only
When you selected Narrow, Normal or Wide
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
When you selected Narrow
135
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper
sounds simultaneously.
●
Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.
●
Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS
button is pressed, but there is a problem with a
system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels
automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously if
selected by customization.
●
If any other system indicators come on, such as the
VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.
2 Indicators P. 78
●
Appears if there is a problem with the adaptive
damper system.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Your vehicle will
have normal damping ability without the adaptive
damper feature.
●
Appears if the ECON mode or SPORT mode
*
cannot
be changed due to certain situations, such as a
system error or adverse driving conditions.
2 ECON Button P. 492
2 SPORT Mode
*
P. 491
Models with adaptive damper system
* Not available on all models
136
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s door
while the engine is running by remote engine start.
2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback
*
P. 469
Models with remote engine starter
* Not available on all models
137
Instrument Panel
Gauges and Displays
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators. They are
displayed when the power mode is in ON.
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
■
Speedometer
■
Fuel Gauge
■
Temperature Gauge
1Speedometer
You can show another speed unit on the driver
information interface and set the displayed
measurements to read in either mph and km/h.
2 Tachometer P. 149
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
E
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 679
138
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Interface
The driver information interface shows the odometer, trip meter, outside
temperature indicator, and other gauges.
It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.
■ Accessing contents in the main display
Press the (home) button, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to the content
you want to see. Press the left selector wheel to see detailed information.
*1: Models with color audio
*2: Models with Display Audio
■
Switching the Display
1Switching the Display
To go back to the previous screen, press the
*1
(hang-up/back)/
*2
(back) button.
You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents using
the audio/information screen.
2 Customizing the Meter P. 285
Models with Display Audio
140
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
■ Sub display
Press the TRIP button to change the display.
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
■
Odometer
Odometer
Outside temperature
Trip A Trip B
TRIP Button
TRIP
TRIP TRIP
Continued
141
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the TRIP Button. The trip meter
is reset to 0.0.
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■ Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading by up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
Use the customized features in the audio/information screen to correct the
temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
■
Trip Meter
■
Outside Temperature
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the TRIP Button.
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
142
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip computer A and trip computer B.
■
Range & Fuel
Left Selector Wheel
Trip Computer A
Trip Computer B
Trip Meter
Range
Average Fuel
Economy
Instant Fuel
Economy
Roll the left
selector wheel.
Continued
143
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
■ Trip meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Resetting a trip meter
To reset the trip meter, display it, press the left selector wheel and then select Reset.
u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.
■ Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel)
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km.
The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel
economy is also reset.
■ Instant fuel economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.
■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated
distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.
1Trip meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
rolling the left selector wheel.
Resetting the trip meter in the Range & Fuel, the trip
meter in the sub display resets at the same time.
1Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel)
You can change when the average fuel economy is
reset.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
144
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip computer A and trip computer B.
■
Speed & Time
Trip Computer A
Trip Computer B
Trip Meter
Average Speed
Elapsed Time
Left Selector Wheel
Roll the left
selector wheel.
Continued
145
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
■ Trip meter
2 Trip meter P. 143
■ Elapsed Time
Shows the time elapsed since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset.
■ Average Speed (Avg. Speed)
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since the last time Trip A or Trip B was
reset.
1Elapsed Time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
1Average Speed (Avg. Speed)
You can change when to reset the average speed.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
146
Instrument Panel
Display Audio shows you turn-by-turn
directions to your destination.
When the navigation system is not providing
driving guidance, an image of a compass
appears in the driver information interface.
2 Refer to the navigation system
■
Navigation
*
1Navigation
*
Turn-by-turn directions will be shown on the driver
information interface only when your android phone
is connected to Android Auto
TM
.
You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn
display come on or not during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 381
Models with Display Audio
Compass
Turn-By-Turn Driving Directions
Models with Display Audio
Models with navigation system
* Not available on all models
Continued
147
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages P. 105
■ Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance
Minder
TM
.
2 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 607
■
Warnings
1Warnings
If there are no Warnings, None message appears on
the driver information interface.
(Example)
■
Maintenance
Continued
149
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Shows the number of engine revolutions per
minute.
■ Speed Unit
Enables you to show another speed unit on
the driver information interface and set the
displayed measurements to read in either mph
and km/h.
Press and hold the left selector wheel when
you select the Tachometer on the driver
information interface. Each time you do this,
the unit will change from mph to km/h or vice
versa. After this, a confirmation screen will
appear for a few seconds.
■
Tachometer
1Tachometer
You can turn on or off the tachometer display when
you does not select the Tachometer on the driver
information interface.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
150
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
■ Turbo Meter
When the turbo charger is producing boost,
this meter shows the boost pressure.
When the SPORT mode is turned on while the
tachometer appears, the turbo meter appears
on the driver information interface.
Shows the current audio information.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 273
Turbo Meter
Models with SPORT mode
■
Audio
*
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
152
Instrument Panel
The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is
being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it
determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the
degree of the driver’s attention on the driver information interface.
When you select Driver Attention on the
driver information interface, bars on it light up
in white to indicate the degree of the driver’s
attention.
2 Accessing contents in the main display
P. 138
■
Driver Attention Monitor
1Driver Attention Monitor
The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if
the driver is tired or inattentive.
Regardless of the system’s feedback, if you are
feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as
long as needed.
Driver Information Interface
Left Selector
Wheel
(home) Button
Level
153
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
If two bars light up, the Driver Attention
Level Low message will appear.
If one bar lights up, the Driver Attention
Level Low. Time For A Break message will
appear, a beep will sound, and the steering
wheel will vibrate.
If this message appears, stop in a safe location
and rest for as long as needed.
The message will disappear when the left
selector wheel is pressed or when the system
has determined that the driver is driving
normally.
If the driver does not take a break and the
monitor continues to detect that the driver is
very tired, the message will appear again after
approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a
beep and steering wheel vibrations.
The message does not appear when the
traveling time is 30 minutes or less.
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
154
Instrument Panel
■ The Driver Attention Monitor resets when:
• The engine is turned off.
• The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.
■ For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
• The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.
■ Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention
Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:
• The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 550
• The condition of the road is poor, e.g. the surface is unpaved or bumpy.
• It is windy.
• The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner such as
changing lanes or accelerating.
■ Customizing
You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile and Audible
Alert
*1
/Tactile And Audible Alert
*2
, Tactile Alert, or Off
*1
/OFF
*2
.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
*1: Models with color audio
*2: Models with Display Audio
1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
The bars on the driver information interface remain
grayed out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is
functioning.
Continued
155
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Shows the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle detected ahead.
Informs you whether ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
and/or LKAS is activated or not. If ACC with
LSF
*
/ACC
*
is activated, the set following
interval is displayed. If LKAS is activated, the
displayed lane marks change to indicate that
LKAS is activated.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 535
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 550
■
Driving Support Information
1Driving Support Information
In case ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
is not activated, when
the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead becomes to small, the section behind the
vehicle icon turns amber and alerts you.
Amber gradation
Icon of vehicle ahead
Distance of vehicle ahead
When ACC and LKAS is in On
Set Vehicle Interval
ACC on: The section behind the
vehicle icon turns green.
LKAS on: The lane outlines
appear on the display.
LKAS starts: The lane lines
change to solid ones.
LKAS suspend: The lane lines
change to dotted ones.
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
156
Instrument Panel
Indicates the state of RDM, CMBS
TM
and the blind spot information system
*
, such as
On, Off, or Failure, by color and letters.
The following colors indicate the state of any of the above mentioned systems:
• Green: The system is on.
• Gray: The system is off.
• Amber: There is a problem with the system.
■
Safety Support
1Safety Support
If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
To turn on or off each system, first rotate the left
selector wheel to switch displays. From the next
display you can select which system to turn on or off.
2 RDM On and Off P. 560
2 CMBS
TM
On and Off P. 513
2 Blind spot information System On and Off
P. 504
You can also confirm the state of the each function
by the color of the safety support indicator.
2 Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 101
2 Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)
P. 104
Area Info for CMBS
TM
CMBS
TM
Icon
and State Info
Area Info
for Blind
spot
information
System
*
RDM Icon and
State Info
Area Info
for RDM
Blind spot
information
System Icon
and State
Info
*
* Not available on all models
157
uuGauges and DisplaysuHead-Up Display
*
Continued
Instrument Panel
Head-Up Display
*
Shows the current mode for ACC with LSF, tachometer, traffic sign recognition
system, gear position indicator, or turn-by-turn directions along with the vehicle
speed. You can choose which item to be displayed using the (HUD) button on
the steering wheel. They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.
To turn the head-up display on and off: Press the HUD button on the driver side
control panel.
The display can be moved up and down to come level with your eyes.
To raise or lower the head-up display: Press and hold the or button until
the desired position is reached.
3
4
/ Button
3
4
HUD Button
Head-Up Display
Press and hold the button
to raise the display.
3
Press and hold the button
to lower the display.
4
* Not available on all models
158
uuGauges and DisplaysuHead-Up Display
*
Instrument Panel
The display also shows the following
warnings.
• Lane Departure Warning: When your
vehicle is too close to the traffic lane lines,
the lane departure warning appears.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
P. 550
• Head-up Warning Lights:
Flash when the BRAKE message appears
on the driver information interface.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 510
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
Lane Departure Warning
* Not available on all models
159
uuGauges and DisplaysuHead-Up Display
*
Continued
Instrument Panel
Each time you press the (HUD) button on the steering wheel, the head-up
display content will change.
■
To Change Head-Up Display Content
Head-Up Display
Current Mode for ACC with
LSF and the LKAS, Vehicle
Speed, Traffic Sign
Recognition System
Vehicle Speed, Traffic
Sign Recognition
System
Tachometer, Gear Position Indicator,
M (sequential mode
*
/7-speed manual
shift mode
*
) Indicator/Gear Selection
Indicator, Vehicle Speed, Traffic Sign
Recognition System
Traffic Sign
Recognition System,
Vehicle Speed
Turn-by-Turn
Directions, Vehicle
Speed, Traffic Sign
Recognition System
Compass, Vehicle
Speed, Traffic Sign
Recognition System
(HUD)
Button
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuHead-Up Display
*
160
Instrument Panel
Shows your driving speed in mph or km/h.
Shows the number of engine revolutions as a bar graph.
Shows the current gear selection.
Shows the current mode for the sequential mode
*
/7-speed manual shift mode
*
.
Shows the current mode for ACC with LSF and the LKAS.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
P. 519
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 550
■
Vehicle Speed
■
Tachometer
■
Gear Position Indicator
■
M (sequential mode
*
/7-speed manual shift mode
*
)
Indicator/Gear Selection Indicator
■
Current Mode for ACC with LSF and the LKAS
1Vehicle Speed
Switch between mph and km/h by using the driver
information interface or customized features on the
audio/information screen.
2 Speed Unit P. 149
2 Customized Features P. 381
* Not available on all models
161
uuGauges and DisplaysuHead-Up Display
*
Instrument Panel
Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the
navigation system.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Shows the traffic sign recognition system.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 562
■
Turn-by-Turn Directions
■
Traffic Sign Recognition System
1Turn-by-Turn Directions
The head-up display shows a compass when the
route guidance is not used.
You can select whether the turn-by-turn display
comes on during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 381
162
163
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................. 164
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 166
Low Remote Signal Strength ............ 168
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 169
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 176
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 178
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 179
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 180
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 183
Security System Alarm...................... 184
Opening and Closing the Windows..... 186
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
..... 189
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 190
Turn Signals..................................... 193
Light Switches.................................. 193
Fog Lights
*
...................................... 195
Daytime Running Lights ................... 196
Auto High-Beam .............................. 197
Wipers and Washers ........................ 200
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button ........................................... 202
Heated Windshield Button ............... 202
Brightness Control ........................... 203
Driving Position Memory System
*
.... 205
Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 207
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 208
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 209
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 210
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 221
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 239
Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 242
Canadian models
* Not available on all models
164
Controls
Clock
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen, with the power
mode in ON.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Select Adjust Clock, then press .
3. Rotate to adjust the hours.
4. Press to switch to minute adjustment.
5. Rotate to adjust the minutes.
6. Press to switch to Set.
7. Press to complete clock adjustment.
■
Adjusting the Time
1Clock
The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 370
You can turn the clock display on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 370
Models with navigation system
Models with color audio
MENU/CLOCK Button
Selector Knob
Models with color audio
165
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock
Controls
1. Press the , then select Settings.
2. Select System.
3. Select Day & Time.
4. Select Set Date & Time.
5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select OFF.
To adjust time:
6. Select Set Time.
7. Selecting / .
8. Select Save to set the time.
To adjust date:
6. Select Set Date.
7. Selecting / .
8. Select Save to set the date.
1Clock
You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock
displayed on the upper right corner of the display or
the Clock icon on the home screen.
1. Touch the clock on the display.
The clock screen of the select face-type appears.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Day & Time.
4. Select Set Date & Time.
5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF.
6. Select Set Date or Set Time.
7. Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by
selecting / .
8. Select Save to set the time.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 381
You can customize the date display to MM/DD/YYYY,
DD/MM/YYYY or YYYY/MM/DD.
2 Customized Features P. 381
Models with Display Audio
3
4
Models with Display Audio
3
4
3
4
166
Controls
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Use the key to start and stop the engine, and to lock and unlock all the doors, fuel
fill door and to open the trunk.
You can also use the remote transmitter or smart entry system
*
to lock and unlock
all the doors, fuel fill door and to open the trunk.
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 183
Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the
keys:
•
Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
•
Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
•
Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand.
•
Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
You can remotely start the engine using the remote.
2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle
Feedback
*
P. 469
Models with remote engine starter
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Models with smart entry system and
remote engine starter
* Not available on all models
167
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
Controls
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors or open the trunk when the remote
battery becomes weak and the power door
lock/unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, slide the release
knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall
the built-in key, push the built-in key into the
remote until it clicks.
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
■
Built-in Key
Built-in Key
Release Knob
■
Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
168
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Remote Signal Strength
Controls
Low Remote Signal Strength
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the remote when locking/unlocking the
doors
*
, and fuel fill door
*
, opening the trunk
*
, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors
*
, and fuel fill door
*
, opening the
trunk
*
, or to start the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the remote together with telecommunications equipment,
laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the remote.
1Low Remote Signal Strength
Communication between the remote and the vehicle
consumes the remote’s battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the remote is
receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near
electrical appliances such as televisions and personal
computers.
* Not available on all models
169
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Continued
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
When you carry the remote, you can lock/
unlock the doors, fuel fill door, and open the
trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors, fuel fill door
within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of
the outside door handle. You can open the
trunk within about 32 inches (80 cm) radius
from the trunk release button.
■ Locking the doors
Touch the door lock sensor on the front door.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors and fuel fill door
lock; and the security system sets.
■
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
*
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior light comes on when you unlock
the doors.
No doors opened: The light fades out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked: The light goes off immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 221
Door Lock Sensor
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
*
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the smart entry system,
the doors and trunk will automatically relock.
You can lock or unlock doors using the smart entry
system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
•
Do not leave the remote in the vehicle when you
get out. Carry it with you.
•
Even if you are not carrying the remote, you can
lock/unlock the doors while someone else with the
remote is within range.
•
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the remote is within range.
•
If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
•
After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds
during which you can pull the door handle to
confirm whether the door is locked.
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
170
Controls
■ Unlocking the doors and trunk
Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door and fuel fill door
unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
u All the doors and fuel fill door unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the trunk release button:
u The trunk unlocks and opens.
u A beeper will sound.
2 Using the Trunk Release Button
*
P. 181
Trunk Release Button
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
*
•
If you need to unlock the door immediately after
locking it, wait at least 2 seconds before gripping
the handle, otherwise the door will not unlock.
•
The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
•
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the
remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
•
The remote may not operate if it is too close to the
door and door glass.
The light flash, beep and door unlock mode settings
can be customized using the audio/information
screen.
2 Customized Features P. 381
* Not available on all models
Continued
171
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
■ Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto
lock®)
When you walk away from the vehicle while
carrying the remote, the doors will
automatically lock.
The auto lock function activates when all
doors are closed, and the remote is within
about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door
handle.
Exit vehicle while carrying remote and close
door(s).
1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of
the vehicle.
u The beeper sounds; the auto lock
function will be activated.
2. Carry the remote beyond about 5 feet
(1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside
this range for 2 or more seconds.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors will then lock.
1Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock®)
The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory
default setting. The auto lock function can be set to
ON using the audio/information screen.
If you set the auto lock function to ON using the
audio/information screen, only the remote that was
used to unlock the driver’s door prior to the setting
change can activate auto lock.
2 Customized Features P. 381
After the auto lock function has been activated,
when you stay within the locking/unlocking
operation range, the indicator on the remote will
continue to flash until the doors are locked.
When you stay beside the vehicle within the
operation range, the doors will automatically lock
approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock
function activating beeper sounds.
When you open a door after the auto lock function
activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will
be delayed until all doors are closed.
When all doors have been closed and the remote is
inside the vehicle, or if the remote is not detected
within about 5 feet (1.5 m) of the vehicle, auto lock
function will not be activated.
If you press the unlock button on the remote within
the operation range soon after the auto lock function
activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will
be canceled.
The activation range of
the auto lock function is
about 5 feet (1.5 m)
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
172
Controls
To temporarily deactivate the function:
1. Set the power mode to OFF.
2. Open the driver’s door.
3. Using the master door lock switch, operate
the lock as follows:
Lock Unlock Lock Unlock.
u The beeper sounds and the function is
deactivated.
To restore the function:
• Set the power mode to ON.
• Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock
function.
• Walk away at least more than about 5 feet
(1.5 m) away from the vehicle while
carrying the remote.
• Open any door.
1Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock®)
The auto lock function does not operate when any of
the following conditions are met.
•
The remote is inside the vehicle.
•
A door or the hood is not closed.
•
The power mode is set to any mode other than
OFF.
•
The remote is not located within a radius of about
5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of
the vehicle and close the doors.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper
After the auto lock function has been activated, the
auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for
approximately two seconds in the following cases.
•
The remote is put inside the vehicle through a
window.
•
You are located too close to the vehicle.
•
The remote is put inside the trunk.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are
carrying the remote. Then, open/close a door and
confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once.
In the case that the remote is out of operating range
when you close a door or the trunk, a beeper will
sound to indicate that the auto lock function has
been canceled.
Continued
173
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
■ Locking the doors
Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors
and fuel fill door lock, and the security
system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u Some exterior lights flash, the beeper
sounds and verifies the security system is
set.
■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the
driver’s door, fuel fill door unlocks.
Twice:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the
remaining doors unlock.
■
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter only when the power mode in VEHICLE
OFF.
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 653
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
LED
Unlock Button
Lock Button
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
174
Controls
If the lock or unlock button of the remote does not work, use the key instead.
Fully insert the key and turn it.
■
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the
other doors and the fuel fill door lock at the same
time. When unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first.
Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to
unlock the remaining doors.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
Lock
Unlock
175
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using
the key, you can lock the door without it.
■ Locking the front doors
Push the lock tab forward
a
or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b
, and close the door.
■ Locking the rear doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■ Lockout prevention system
The doors cannot be locked when the remote is inside the vehicle.
■
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door or lock the
passenger’s door using the master door lock switch,
all the other doors and the fuel fill door lock at the
same time.
Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not
inside the vehicle.
176
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■ Unlocking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
■
Using the Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, all the other doors and the fuel fill door
lock at the same time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.
To Unlock
Lock Tab
To Lock
Continued
177
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Pull the front door inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors and the fuel fill door.
To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off
*1
/OFF
*2
using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
*1: Models with color audio
*2: Models with Display Audio
■
Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However, this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 178
Inner Handle
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
178
Controls
Press the master door lock switch in (as
shown) to lock or unlock all the doors, fuel fill
door.
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■ When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
■
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
To Unlock
Master Door
Lock Switch
To Lock
■
Setting the Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Unlock
Lock
179
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Controls
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.
■ Drive lock mode
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■ Driver’s door open mode
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
■
Auto Door Locking
■
Auto Door Unlocking
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the audio/
information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
180
Controls
Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■ Opening the trunk
Opening the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
■ Closing the trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 75
Using the Trunk Opener
Press and hold the trunk opener on the
driver’s door to unlock and open the trunk.
2 When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 695
Trunk Opener
181
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button
*
Controls
Using the Trunk Release Button
*
Push up the release button on the trunk lid
after all the doors are unlocked.
2 When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 695
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the
trunk if you carry the remote.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds.
Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.
1Using the Trunk Release Button
*
•
If you forget the remote inside, the beeper will
sound and the trunk will not close.
•
A person who is not carrying the remote can
unlock the trunk if a person who is carrying it is
within range.
•
If the beeper sounds after you close the trunk,
move the remote away from the trunk and close
again.
•
The remote may not operate if it is too close to the
trunk.
Trunk Release Button
Trunk Release Button
* Not available on all models
182
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuTrunk Main Switch
*
Controls
Trunk Main Switch
*
The trunk main switch disables the trunk
release button on the remote transmitter and
the trunk release button on the trunk lid and
trunk opener on the driver’s door to protect
luggage in the trunk.
1. Make sure the rear seat-back is not folded
down.
2. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove
box.
3. Lock the glove box.
Emergency Trunk Opener
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.
1Trunk Main Switch
*
If you need to give the key to someone else, remove
the built-in key from the remote by sliding the release
knob, and give the remote as a valet key.
ON
OFF
Main Switch
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.
Lever
* Not available on all models
183
Controls
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
• Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and
audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can
become magnetic.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or
accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the key with you whenever you leave the
vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the
vehicle on the first time after the battery has been
disconnected.
Canadian models
184
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not activate if the trunk or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter, or smart entry with push button start system
*
.
However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the
transmission is taken out of
(P (continuously variable transmission models) or the
hood is opened before the power mode is in ON.
■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently, and some the exterior lights flash.
■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry with push
button start system
*
. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is
deactivated.
■ Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
• The hood and trunk are closed.
• All doors are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry
with push button start system
*
.
■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking
interval changes after about 15 seconds.
■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key
*
,
remote transmitter or smart entry with push button start system
*
, or when the power
mode is set to ON. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
1Security System Alarm
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
•
Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
•
Opening the trunk with the trunk opener or the
emergency trunk opener.
•
Opening the hood with the hood release.
•
Taking the transmission out of (P.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter,
or smart entry with push button start system
*
.
Continuously variable transmission models
* Not available on all models
185
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
■ Canceling panic mode
• Press any button on the remote transmitter.
• Set the power mode to ON.
■
Panic Mode
Panic Button
186
Controls
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON,
using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to open and
close all the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (indicator
off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat.
When the power window lock button is pressed, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on
(indicator on) if a child is in the vehicle.
■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■
Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3
WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
Power
Window
Lock Button
Indicator
Driver’s Window
Switch
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch
187
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Continued
Controls
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
To open: Press the unlock button, and then
within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it.
If the windows and moonroof
*
stop midway,
repeat the procedure.
■
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
Close
Open
■
Opening Windows and Moonroof
*
with the Remote
Unlock
Button
* Not available on all models
188
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof
*
at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.
■
Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof
*
with the Key
Close
Open
* Not available on all models
189
Controls
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch
in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
pull or push the switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly,
then release.
■
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to OFF.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
You can use the remote transmitter or the key to
operate the moonroof.
2 Opening Windows and Moonroof
*
with
the Remote P. 187
2 Opening/Closing the Windows and
Moonroof
*
with the Key P. 188
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Open
Close
Tilt
* Not available on all models
190
Controls
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button
*1: Manual transmission models
*2: Continuously variable transmission models for Canadian models
*3: U.S. models
*4: Automatic transmission models
■
Changing the Power Mode
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
You can start the engine when the remote is inside
the vehicle.
If the battery of the remote is getting low, the engine
may not start when you push the ENGINE START/
STOP button. If the engine does not start, refer to
the following link.
2 If the Remote Battery is Weak P. 672
The engine may also run if the remote is close to the
door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.
ON mode:
The ENGINE START/STOP button is red when the
engine is running.
Operating Range
Continuously Variable Transmission Automatic/Manual Transmission
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
The button is off.
The steering wheel is locked
*1*2
.
The power to all electrical
components is turned off.
Press the button without the
transmission in
(P.
Put the transmission into
(P
then press the button.
Press the button.
Without pressing the
clutch
*1
or brake
*4
pedal
Without pressing
the brake pedal
ACCESSORY
The button blinks (in red).
Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
ON
The button blinks (in red).
All electrical components can be
used.
Put the transmission into
(P
*3
.
*3
Continued
191
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Controls
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P
*1
and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.
When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock.
You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry with
push button start system
*
.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.
*1: Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
■
Automatic Power Off
■
Power Mode Reminder
1Changing the Power Mode
If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE
OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while moving the steering wheel left and
right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the
mode to change.
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
for Canadian models
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
for Canadian models
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
192
Controls
Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/
or outside the vehicle to remind you that the
remote is out of the vehicle. If the buzzer
continues even after the remote is put back
inside, place it to be within its operational
range.
■ When the power mode is in ON
If the remote is taken out of the vehicle, and
the driver’s door is closed, a warning buzzer
sounds from both inside and outside the
vehicle. A warning message on the driver
information interface notifies the driver inside
that the remote is outside of the vehicle.
■ When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the remote is taken out of the vehicle, and
all the doors are closed, a warning buzzer
sounds from outside the vehicle.
■
Remote Reminder
1Remote Reminder
When the remote is within the system’s operational
range, and the driver’s door is closed, the warning
function cancels.
If the remote is taken out of the vehicle after the
engine has been started, you can no longer change
the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart
the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your
vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
Removing the remote from the vehicle through a
window does not activate the warning buzzer.
Do not put the remote on the dashboard or in the
glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off.
Under some other conditions that can prevent the
vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer
may also go off even if the remote is within the
system’s operational range.
193
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Continued
Controls
Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the power
mode is in ON.
■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the power mode
setting.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
Right Turn
Left Turn
■
Manual Operation
1Light Switches
If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 94
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
High Beams
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
194
Controls
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the power mode is in ON.
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
u You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
The headlights comes on when you unlock a
door in dark areas with the headlight switch in
AUTO.
u Once you lock the door, the headlights
will go off.
■
Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Light Sensor
Models without automatic
intermittent wipers
Light Sensor
Models with automatic
intermittent wipers
195
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights
*
Controls
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, take the remote with you,
and close the driver’s door.
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF with the headlight switch on, but do not
open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in
the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
Fog Lights
*
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
■
Headlight Integration with Wipers
■
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
Bright
Dark
1Headlight Integration with Wipers
This feature activates while the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.
1Automatic Lighting Off Feature
You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
Fog Light Switch
* Not available on all models
196
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
Controls
Daytime Running Lights
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The headlight switch is off, or in .
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when
the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.
1Daytime Running Lights
The parking lights serve as daytime running lights.
197
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel uAuto High-Beam
Continued
Controls
Auto High-Beam
Using a camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, this system detects light
sources ahead of the vehicle. Depending on the light source, the system
automatically switches the headlights to high beam for optimal visibility at night.
1Auto High-Beam
The auto high-beam determines when to change the
headlight beams by responding to the brightness of
the lights ahead of your vehicle. In the following
cases, the system may not respond to the lights
properly:
•
The brightness of the lights from the preceding or
oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
•
Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
fog, windshield frost, etc.).
•
Other light sources, such as streetlights and electric
billboards are illuminating the road ahead.
•
The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
changes.
•
The road is bumpy or with many curves.
•
A vehicle cuts in front of you, or a vehicle in front
of you is not in the preceding or oncoming
direction.
•
Your vehicle is tilted with heavy load in the rear.
If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient
for driving, change the headlight beams manually.
■
The headlight switch is in
AUTO.
■
The lever is in the low beam
position.
■
The low beams are on and the
system recognizes that you are
driving at night.
■
The vehicle speed is above
25 mph (40 km/h).
The system operates when:
When the camera detects lights coming from a preceding or oncoming vehicle, the
headlights remain in low beam.
When the camera detects no lights coming from a preceding or oncoming vehicle,
the headlights change to high beam.
The view angle or distance that the camera can detect lights ahead differs
depending on conditions, such as the brightness of the lights and the weather.
How it works
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
198
Controls
To activate the system, turn the headlight
switch to AUTO and then set the headlights
to low beam. The auto high-beam indicator
will come on.
2 Light Switches P. 193
The high beams remain on unless:
• You have been driving below 15 mph (24 km/h) for an extended amount of time.
• The speed of the vehicle drops below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• The windshield wipers have been running at a high speed for more than a few
seconds.
• You enter a well lit location.
The high beams come back on once the condition that caused them to turn off no
longer exists.
If needed, you can temporarily turn the high beams off manually. Turn on the high
beams by pushing the lever forward until you hear a click, or flash the high beams
once by pulling the lever toward you. To turn the high beams back on, repeat one
of the procedures.
■
Operating the System
1Operating the System
For the auto high-beam to work properly:
•
Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard.
•
Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
•
Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area
around the camera.
•
Do not touch the camera lens.
If you do not want the system to be activated at any
time when the headlight switch is in AUTO, consult a
dealer or disable the system.
2 Disabling or Re-enabling the System P. 199
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of
the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun.
If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to
cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can
concentrate heat on the camera.
If the message appears:
•
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Headlight Switch
199
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel uAuto High-Beam
Controls
Disabling or re-enabling the system when the
vehicle is parked with the power mode is in
ON and the light switch is in the AUTO
position.
Disabling the system: Pull the light switch
lever towards you and hold it for 40 seconds.
The indicator blinks twice.
Re-enabling the system: Pull the light
switch lever towards you and hold it for 30
seconds. The indicator blinks once.
■
Disabling or Re-enabling the System
1Disabling or Re-enabling the System
The auto high-beam is in the previously selected
disabled or re-enabled setting each time you start the
engine.
AUTO Position
200
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the power mode is in ON.
■ MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT
*1
/AUTO
*2
, LO, HI)
Move the lever up or down to change the
wiper settings.
■ Adjusting wiper operation
*
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
operation.
■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two
or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.
*1: Models with manual intermittent operation
*2: Models with automatic intermittent operation
■
Windshield Wiper/Washer
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation
temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation
will return to normal within a few minutes, once the
circuit has returned to normal.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
NOTICE
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defogger or heated windshield
*
to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.
Models with intermittent time adjustment ring
MIST
INT
*1
/AUTO
*2
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull to
use
washer.
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring
*
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Higher speed, more sweeps
* Not available on all models
201
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the
windshield wipers sweep once, and go into
the automatic mode.
The wipers operate intermittently, at low
speed, or at high speed and stops in
accordance with the amount of rainfall the
rainfall sensor detects.
■ AUTO sensitivity adjustment
When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you
can adjust the sensitivity of the rain fall sensor
(using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will
operate in accordance with your preference.
Sensor sensitivity
■
Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
1Wipers and Washers
If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power
mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then remove
the obstacle.
1Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
AUTO should always be turned OFF before the
following situations in order to prevent severe
damage to the wiper system:
•
Cleaning the windshield
•
Driving through a car wash
•
No rain present
Rainfall Sensor
Adjustment Ring
Low Sensitivity
High Sensitivity
* Not available on all models
202
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
Controls
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window
and mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, it does not automatically
switch off.
Heated Windshield Button
Press the heated windshield button to deice
the windshield when the power mode is in
ON.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged or deiced.
Also, do not use the system for a long time while the
engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making
it difficult to start the engine.
When the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C),
the heated door mirror may activate automatically for
10 minutes when you set the power mode to ON.
Canadian models
1Heated Windshield Button
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged or deiced.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.
* Not available on all models
203
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Continued
Controls
Brightness Control
When the power mode is in ON, you can use
the brightness control dial to adjust
instrument panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the dial up.
Dim: Turn the dial down.
You will hear a beeper when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. Several
seconds after you have adjusted the
brightness, you will be returned to the
previous screen.
■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the driver
information interface while you are adjusting
it.
■
Adjusting the Instrument Panel Brightness
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
To cancel the reduced instrument panel brightness
when the exterior lights are on, turn the dial up until
the brightness display is up to max, the beeper
sounds.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
Control Dial
204
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls
When the head-up display is on, press and
hold the HUD button until its brightness level
indicator on the driver information interface.
Brighten: Press the button.
Dim: Press the button.
Several seconds after you have adjusted the
brightness, you will be returned to the
previous screen.
■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the driver
information interface while you are adjusting
it.
■
Adjusting the Head-Up Display Brightness
*
/ Button
3
4
HUD Button
3
4
* Not available on all models
205
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
*
Continued
Controls
Driving Position Memory System
*
You can store two driver’s seat positions (except for power lumbar) with the driving
position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver's door with a remote transmitter, or smart
entry system to one of the two preset positions and the seat adjusts to retracted
positions of one of the two preset positions automatically.
The seat will move to the stored position when you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY.
When you enter the vehicle, the driver information interface briefly shows you which
remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle.
• DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
• DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
The driver’s seat moves rearward depending
on the set seating position once you
• Stop the vehicle.
• Put the transmission into
(P.
• Turn the engine off.
• Then open the driver’s door.
Once the power mode is in the ACCESSORY
position, the driver’s seat moves forward to
the DRIVER 1 or 2 preset position.
1Driving Position Memory System
*
Using the audio/information screen you can disable
the automatic seat adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 381
The driver’s seat easy exit feature can be turned ON/
OFF.
2 Customized Features P. 381
System Operation
The system will not operate if:
•
The vehicle speed is above 2 mph (3 km/h).
•
Either memory position button is pressed while the
seat is in motion.
•
The seat position is adjusted while in operation.
•
The memory 1 or 2 position is set fully to the rear.
DRIVER 1
DRIVER 2
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
*
206
Controls
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the
driver’s seat to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button.
u You will hear the beeper, and the
memory button indicator light will blink.
3. Press the memory button
(1 or (2 within
five seconds of pressing the SET button.
u Once the seat position has been
memorized, the indicator light on the
button you pressed stays on and you will
hear two beeps.
1. Put the transmission into
(P.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press a memory button (
(1 or (2).
u You will hear a beep, and the indicator
light will blink.
The seat will automatically move to the
memorized position. When it has finished
moving, you will hear a beep, and the
indicator light stays on.
■
Storing a Position in Memory
1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation
will be canceled when:
•
You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
•
You readjust the seat position before the two
beeps.
•
You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2
SET Button
■
Recalling the Stored Position
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat will stop moving if:
•
The vehicle speed is above 2 mph (3 km/h).
•
You press the SET button or memory button (1 or
(2.
•
You adjust the seat position.
Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2
207
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Controls
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down.
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up
to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3
WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
To adjust
To lock
Lever
208
Controls
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
When you are driving after dark, the
automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces
the glare from headlights behind you. Press
the auto mirror button to turn this function on
and off. When activated, the auto indicator
comes on.
■
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions
*
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 210
Tab
Daytime
Position
Night
Position
Up
Down
■
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
The auto dimming function cancels when the
transmission is in
(R.
Auto Mirror Button
Down
Up
* Not available on all models
209
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Controls
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
power mode is in ON.
■ Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
If activated, passenger’s side door mirror
automatically tilts downward when you put
the transmission into
(R; this improves close-
in visibility on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle when backing up. The mirror
automatically returns to its original position
when you take the transmission out of
(R.
To activate this feature, set the power mode to ON and slide the selector switch to
the passenger’s side.
Selector
Switch
Adjustment Switch
■
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
*
Selector Switch
* Not available on all models
210
Controls
Adjusting the Seats
Front Seats
Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
■ Adjusting the front power seat(s)
*
1Adjusting the Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
3
WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Move back.
Allow sufficient
space.
■
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Height Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Driver’s seat is shown
* Not available on all models
211
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
Continued
Controls
■ Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch
*
Press the top: To move the lumbar support
up.
Press the bottom: To move the lumbar
support down.
Press the front: To increase the entire
lumbar support.
Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar
support.
Lumbar
Support
Adjustment
Switch
* Not available on all models
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
212
Controls
■ Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
*
1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
*
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.
Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.
Driver’s seat is shown.
* Not available on all models
213
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
Controls
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
■
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
3
WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
214
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Controls
Rear Seats
1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the
guide.
2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release
the lock.
3. Fold the seat-back down.
■
Folding Down the Rear Seat(s)
1Folding Down the Rear Seat(s)
The rear seat-back(s
*
) can be folded down to
accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the
trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 75
To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it
locks.
When returning the seat-back to its original position,
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the
center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 59
Make sure all items in the trunk or items
extending through the opening into the rear
seat is properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they
do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold
down.
Guide
Center
Shoulder Belt
Release
Lever
Release
Lever
*
* Not available on all models
215
uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
Controls
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the power
mode is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
216
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Controls
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rear-
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant’s ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
■
Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer
*
Head Restraint Positions
1Head Restraints
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
•
Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
•
Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
•
Install each restraint in its proper location.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
* Not available on all models
217
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Continued
Controls
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.
Front
Rear
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
218
Controls
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
■
Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3
WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
219
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Continued
Controls
Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
■
Using the Front Seat Armrest
Automatic transmission/
Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission models
220
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Controls
Pull down the armrest in the center backrest.
■
Using the Rear Seat Armrest
221
Continued
Controls
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ ON
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver’s door.
• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF.
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■
Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the
following situations:
•
When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it.
•
When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF but
do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
•
When you lock the driver’s door.
•
When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY
mode.
•
When you set the power mode to ON.
To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the
interior lights on for an extended length of time
when the engine is off.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF
mode, the interior lights go off after about 15
minutes.
Door Activated Position
OFF
Front
*
Door Activated
Position
ON
OFF
Rear
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
222
Controls
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
When the parking lights are on, push the
ambient light switch to turn the ambient lights
on.
■
Map Lights
1Map Lights
When the interior light switch is in the door activated
position and any door is open, the map light will not
go off when you press the lens.
Models with moonroof
■
Ambient Lights
*
Ambient Lights
* Not available on all models
223
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
Interior Convenience Items
Pull the handle to open the glove box.
You can lock the glove box with the built-in
key.
Push the cover to open the pocket.
■
Glove Box
1Glove Box
3
WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
Glove Box
Handle
To Lock
Models with trunk main switch
■
Center Pocket
224
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.
■
Console Compartment
Automatic transmission/
Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission models
225
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
■ Removable tray
The tray in the console compartment is
detachable. To remove the tray, simply pull it
up.
Automatic transmission/
Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
226
Controls
■ Front seat beverage holders
Are located in the console between the front
seats.
■
Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE
Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
Automatic transmission/
Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission models
227
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
■ Door side beverage holders
Are located on the both of front and rear door
side pockets.
■ Rear seat beverage holders
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.
Front
Rear
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
228
Controls
The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY
or ON.
■ Accessory power socket (center pocket)
Open the center pocket and the cover to use
it.
■
Accessory Power Sockets
1Accessory Power Sockets
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element. The power socket can overheat.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated
180 watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent battery drain, use the power socket only
when the engine is running.
When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
180 watts (15 amps).
229
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
■ Accessory power socket (console
compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
Automatic transmission/
Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
230
Controls
To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows:
1. To turn the system on and off, press and
hold the (power) button.
u When the system is activated, the green
indicator light comes on.
2. Place the device you want to charge on the
charging area.
u The system will automatically start
charging the device, and the amber
indicator light will come on.
u Make sure that the device is compatible
with the system, and placed with the
chargeable side in the center of the
charging area.
3. When charging is completed, the green
indicator light will come on.
u Depending on the device, the amber
indicator light will stay on.
■
Wireless Charger
*
1Wireless Charger
*
FCC statement
This product complies with the appropriate
requirements or the required standards of FCC
(Federal Communication Commission), described
below:
This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC rules.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
per the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications.
In order to use safely:
•
Remove any metal objects from the charge pad
before charging a device.
•
Do not open the charger case.
•
Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact
your dealer.
If the charger interferes with radio communications,
attempt to correct the interference:
•
Press and hold the switch on the charger for a few
seconds to turn off the charger.
appears on the audio/information screen when
the device is being charged by the wireless charger.
Green Indicator
Amber Indicator
Charging Area
(Power)
Button
* Not available on all models
Continued
231
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
■ When charging does not start
Perform one of the solutions in the following table.
Indicator Cause Solution
Green
&
Amber
Blinking
simulta-
neously
There is an obstacle(s) between
the charging area and the
device.
Remove the
obstacle(s).
The device is not within the
charging area.
Move the device to the
center of the charging
area where is
located.
Amber Blinking The wireless charger is faulty.
Contact a dealer for
repairs.
1Wireless Charger
*
This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the
system for a long time when the engine is not
running. This may weaken the battery, making it
difficult to start the engine.
When using the wireless charger, check the user’s
manual that came with the compatible device you
want to charge.
3
CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad
and the device to be charged will get
hot and can burn you.
• Always remove foreign objects from
the charge pad before charging the
device.
• Be sure the surface is clear of dust and
other debris before charging.
• Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks,
etc.) on the charger and the device.
• Do not use oil, grease, alcohol,
benzine or thinner for cleaning the
charge pad.
• Do not cover the system with towels,
clothing, or other objects while
charging etc.
• Avoid spraying aerosols which may
come in contact with the charge pad
surface.
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
232
Controls
1Wireless Charger
*
NOTICE
Do not place any magnetic recording media or precision
machines within the charging area while charging.
The data on your cards such as credit cards can be
lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision
machines such as watches can go wrong.
“Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks
owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).
In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:
•
The device is already fully charged.
•
The temperature of the device is extremely high
while charging.
•
You are at a place that emits strong
electromagnetic waves or noises such as TV station,
electric power plant, or gas station.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its
chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the
charging area.
Not all devices are compatible with the system.
During the charging phase, it is normal for the
charging area and device to heat up.
Charging may be briefly interrupted when:
•
All the doors or the trunk are closed
- to avoid interference with the proper functioning
of the smart entry system.
•
The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a
charging area.
* Not available on all models
Continued
233
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle. Pull it down to use it.
The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to
install a net for securing items.
■
Coat Hook
1Coat Hook
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.
■
Cargo Hooks
1Cargo Hooks
Heavy objects may damage the hook.
Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than
6.6 lbs (3 kg).
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,
placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 457
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
234
Controls
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
■
Sunglasses Holder
1Sunglasses Holder
Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.
Push
Continued
235
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The power mode must be in ON to use the
heated steering wheel.
Press the button on the lower side of the
steering wheel.
When a comfortable temperature is reached,
press the button again to turn it off.
The heated steering wheel is turned off every
time you start the engine, even if you turned it
on the last time you drove the vehicle.
■
Heated Steering Wheel
*
Canadian models
1Heated Steering Wheel
*
Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously
when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the
battery may be weakened, making the engine
difficult to start.
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
236
Controls
The power mode must be in ON to use the
seat heaters.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When the power mode is turned on after it is
turned off, the previous setting of front seat
heaters is maintained.
■
Front Seat Heaters
*
1Front Seat Heaters
*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for
the front seat heaters will automatically be reduced
by one level at a time until the front seat heaters
shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the
interior environment.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
Continued
237
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The power mode must be in ON to use the
seat heaters or ventilation.
Press the seat heater or the seat ventilation
button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When the power mode is turned on after it is
turned off, the previous setting of front seat
heaters and ventilation is maintained.
■
Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation
*
1Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation
*
Do not use the seat heaters and the seat ventilation
even in LO when the engine is off. Under such
conditions, the battery may be weakened, making
the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for
the front seat heaters will automatically be reduced
by one level at a time until the front seat heaters
shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the
interior environment.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
238
Controls
The power mode must be in ON to use the
seat heaters.
There is no heater in the rear center seating
position.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
■
Rear Seat Heaters
*
1Rear Seat Heaters
*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for
the rear seat heaters will automatically be reduced by
one level at a time until the rear seat heaters shuts
off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior
environment.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
239
Continued
Controls
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control
dial.
3. Press the (on/off) button to cancel.
■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.
While ECON mode is active, the climate control
system may have reduced cooling performance.
Floor and
defroster
vents
Floor ventsDashboard and floor
vents, and back of
the center console
*
Dashboard vents
and back of the
center console
*
AUTO Button
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Dial
(Recirculation)
Button
Fan Control Dial
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Dial
(on/off) Button
* Not available on all models
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
240
Controls
Pressing the button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the button.
2. Press the button.
■
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.
241
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronization mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system will switch to the synchronization mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button or adjust the interior temperature using the passenger’s side
control dial to return to dual mode.
■
Synchronization Mode
1Synchronization Mode
When you press the button, the system changes
to synchronization mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.
The system adjusts each temperature based on the
information of the sunlight sensor and the sun
position updated by the navigation system.
Models with navigation system
242
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Controls
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Sensor
Sensor
243
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 244
USB Port(s)....................................... 245
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 247
Audio Remote Controls.................... 248
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 252
Audio/Information Screen ................ 253
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 257
Display Setup ................................... 258
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 259
Playing an iPod ................................ 261
Playing Pandora®.............................. 264
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 266
Models with color audio
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 269
Siri® Eyes Free .................................. 272
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 273
Audio/Information Screen ................ 274
System Updates ............................... 286
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 292
Display Setup ................................... 293
Voice Control Operation .................. 295
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 298
Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
................. 302
Playing an iPod ................................ 313
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 316
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 319
Models with Display Audio
HondaLink® ..................................... 321
HondaLink® Service
*
........................ 325
Wi-Fi Connection............................. 330
Near Field Communication (NFC)
*
... 332
Siri® Eyes Free .................................. 335
Apple CarPlay® ................................ 336
Android Auto
TM
............................... 339
Audio Error Messages ...................... 343
General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 348
Customized Features................ 370, 381
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
..... 400
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 403, 427
Refuel Recommend .............................. 452
* Not available on all models
244
Features
Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio
*
service. It can also
play USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and knobs on the panel, the
remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface
*
.
1About Your Audio System
iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
SiriusXM® Radio
*
is available on a subscription basis
only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio
*
,
contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 348
SiriusXM® Radio
*
is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
SiriusXM®
*
is a registered trademark of SiriusXM
Radio
*
, Inc.
Remote Controls
iPod
USB Flash Drive
*
*1
*2
*1: Models with Display Audio
*2: Models with color audio
* Not available on all models
245
uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s)
Continued
Features
USB Port(s)
Install the iPod USB connector or the USB flash drive to the USB port.
■ In the Center Pocket
The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files
on a USB flash drive, connecting a cellular
phone and charging devices.
The USB port (2.5A) is for charging devices,
playing audio files and connecting compatible
phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
1USB Port(s)
•
Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
•
We recommend using an extension cable with the
USB port.
•
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
•
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
•
We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
•
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.
The USB port can supply up to 1.0A/2.5A of power. It
does not output 1.0A/2.5A unless the device
requests.
For amperage details, read the operating manual of
the device that needs to be charged.
Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON first.
Under certain conditions, a device connected to the
port may generate noise in the radio you are listening
to.
USB charge
Models
with
color
audio
Models
with
Display
Audio
In the Center Pocket
Models with color audio
Models with Display Audio
uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s)
246
Features
■ In the console compartment
*
The USB port (2.5A) is for charging devices,
playing audio files and connecting compatible
phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
■ Rear of the center console
*
The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging
devices.
In the Console Compartment
*
Manual
transmission
models
Except
manual
transmission
models
1USB Port(s)
These ports are for battery charge only. You cannot
play music even if you have connected music players
to them.
Under certain conditions, a device connected to the
port may generate noise in the radio you are listening
to.
Rear of the center console
*
Rear of the center console
*
* Not available on all models
247
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
Features
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power knob for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
248
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Audio Remote Controls
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM1FM2AMUSB/iPod
Pandora®Bluetooth® Audio
VOL
(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
Press VOL
(+: To increase the volume.
Press VOL(-: To decrease the volume.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
1Audio Remote Controls
Some modes appear only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be operated.
Press the (Hang-up/back) button to go back to
the previous command or cancel a command.
Models with color audio
Models with color audio
/
(Seek/Skip)
Buttons
SOURCE
Button
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
(Hang-up/back) Button
Continued
249
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on
the driver information interface or head-up display
*
.
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
Press VOL(+: To increase the volume.
Press VOL
(-: To decrease the volume.
Left Selector Wheel
• When selecting the audio mode
Press the (home) button, then roll up or down to select Audio on the driver
information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.
1Audio Remote Controls
Press the (back) button for the driver
information interface to go back to the previous
screen or cancel a command.
Press the (home) button to go back to the home
screen of the driver information interface.
Models with Display Audio
Models with Display Audio
/
(Seek/Skip)
Buttons
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
Left Selector Wheel
(home) Button
(back)
button
* Not available on all models
250
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Roll up or down:
FM
AM
SiriusXM®
*
USB1
USB2
*
Bluetooth® Audio
Smartphone Connection
(Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)
To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down
and then press the left selector wheel:
* Not available on all models
251
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio, or Smartphone
Connection
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
252
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK
button to access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any
mode.
The available mode includes the wallpaper,
display, clock, language setup, and play
modes. Play modes can be also selected from
scan, random, repeat, and so on.
(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display.
(Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode.
(Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen
brightness.
Press , then adjust the brightness using .
u Each time you press , the mode switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.
Models with color audio
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Menu Items
2 Adjust Clock P. 164
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 255
2 Display Setup P. 258
2 Scan P. 300
2 Play Mode P. 263
2 RDS Settings P. 260
2 Bluetooth P. 269
Press the SOURCE, VOL
(+/VOL(-, or
button on the steering wheel to change any audio
setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 248
(Day/Night)
Button
Selector Knob
MENU/CLOCK Button
(Back) button
(Sound) Button
Menu Display
253
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.
■
Switching the Display
Audio
Audio/Information Screen
Clock/Wallpaper
Trip computer (History of Trip A)
Trip computer (Current Drive)
254
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)
Shows the average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving
cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
■ Change display
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
4. Rotate to select Clock/Wallpaper, then press .
u If you want to return to the audio display, select Audio.
Continued
255
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a
time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
2. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
3. Rotate to select Settings, then press
.
4. Rotate to select Clock/Wallpaper
Type, then press .
5. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then
press .
6. Rotate to select Import, then press
.
u The picture name is displayed on the
list.
7. Rotate to select a desired picture, then
press .
u The selected picture is displayed.
8. Press to save the picture.
9. Press to select OK.
10. Rotate to select a location to save the
picture, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper
setting screen.
■
Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
•
When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
•
The file name must be fewer than 32 characters.
•
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
•
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
•
The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If
the size of the image is small, it will be enlarged,
with the aspect ratio remaining the same.
•
Up to 255 files can be selected.
•
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the Unable to load image. message appears.
•
The wallpaper setup is limited while driving.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
256
Features
■ Select wallpaper
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then press .
4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
5. Rotate to select Select, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
6. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .
■ To view wallpaper once it is set
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
4. Rotate to select Clock/Wallpaper, then press .
5. Press the (Back) button until the top screen is displayed.
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then press .
4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
5. Rotate to select Delete, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
6. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .
7. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.
1Wallpaper Setup
To go back to the previous screen, press the
(Back) button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
257
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
Press the (sound) button, and rotate
to scroll through the following choices:
Rotate to adjust the sound setting, then
press .
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
Selector Knob
(Sound) Button
BAS is selectable.
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
BAS
MID
TRE
FAD
BAL
SVC
Bass
Middle
Treble
Fader
Balance
258
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Display Adjustment,
then press .
4. Rotate to select Brightness, then press
.
5. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Color Theme, then
press .
4. Rotate to select the setting you want,
then press .
■
Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
■
Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
259
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen
RADIO Button
Press to select a band.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear
a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then
press the preset button.
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
Press, and then turn to select an item.
After that, press again to make your
selection.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
(Back) button
Press to go back to the previous display
or cancel a setting.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press or to search up
and down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
260
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate to select the station, then press .
■ Update List
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate to select Update List, then press .
■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select RDS Settings, then press .
4. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press .
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 248
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory. FM1 and FM2 let you store 6
stations each.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
261
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Continued
Features
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB Port, then press the MEDIA
button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
Audio/Information Screen
MEDIA Button
Press to select iPod (if connected).
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Play Button
Press to resume a song.
Album Art
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.
(Back) button
Press to go back to the previous display
or cancel a setting.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press or to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
Play Mode Buttons
Press to select a play mode.
Pause Button
Press to pause a song.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
262
Features
1. Press to display the iPod music list.
2. Rotate to select a category.
3. Press to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
u Press and rotate repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is
displayed.
■
How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the
Selector Knob
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 343
Category
Selection
Item
Selection
263
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.
■ To turn off a play mode
Press the selected button.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in
a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All: Plays all available songs in a
selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, or composers) in random order.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current song.
You can also select a play mode by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then
press .
Play Mode Buttons
264
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
Features
Playing Pandora®
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a
compatible smartphone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using
your USB cable to the USB port.
2 Phone Setup P. 409
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
1Playing Pandora®
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora
website for more information.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/
or call 1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
Find the music you love and let the music you love
find you. Pandora® gives you a personalized music
experience that continually evolves with your tastes.
Create personalized stations from songs, artists or
genres. Not sure where to start? Use our voice search
to easily find stations that match your mood or
activity.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
Audio/Information Screen
Selector Knob
Turn to change a station.
Press, and then turn to select an
item. After that, press again to
make your selection.
VOL/ (Volume/
Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or
cancel a setting.
MEDIA Button
Press to select Pandora®.
Play/Pause Button
Select to resume or play a track.
(Skip) Button
Press to skip a
track.
Like/Dislike Buttons
Select to evaluate a track.
MENU/CLOCK
Button
Press to display
the menu items.
Bookmark Button
Select to set a track as a bookmark.
265
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
Features
You can create a station when playing Pandora®.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select New Station, then
press .
3. Rotate to select an item, then press .
u You can select Genre, Current Artist,
or Current Track.
■
How to Create a Station
1How to Create a Station
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 345
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.
To change stations, press on the main Pandora®
screen, and rotate to select Station List, and
then select a new station.
266
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC
*1
format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
MEDIA Button
Press to select USB flash drive (if
connected).
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change files.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is
connected.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press or to change tracks.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
Play Mode Buttons (1-6)
Press to select a play mode.
Continued
267
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
1. Press to display a folder list.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to display a list of files in that
folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■
How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 348
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 343
Track
Selection
Folder
Selection
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
268
Features
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.
■ To turn off a play mode
Press the selected button.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat
Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the
current folder.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Random
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the
current folder in random order.
Random All: Plays all files in random order.
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of
the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of
all files in the current folder.
You can also select a play mode by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then
press .
Play Mode Buttons
269
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Continued
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 432
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
•
U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-888-528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some
devices.
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the
menu items.
MEDIA Button
Bluetooth Audio mode
(if connected)
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is
connected to HFL.
VOL/ (Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Audio/Information Screen
Play Button (Preset 1)
Press to resume a file.
Pause Button (Preset 2)
Press to pause a file.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Selector Knob
Turn to change groups.
Press, and then turn to
select an item. After
that, press again to make
your selection.
/ (Seek/
Skip) Buttons
Press or
to change files.
Press and hold to
move rapidly
within a file.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
270
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the MEDIA button until the
Bluetooth® Audio mode is selected.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■ To pause or resume a file
Press the play or pause button to select a mode.
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the USB port, you
may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to
select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
MEDIA Button
Play Button
Pause Button
271
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
1. Press to display the music search list.
2. Rotate to select a category.
3. Press to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
u Press and rotate repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is
displayed.
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the
Selector Knob
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector
Knob
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the categories may not be displayed.
Item
Selection
Category
Selection
272
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free
Features
Siri® Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your
iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 409
■
Using Siri® Eyes Free
1Siri® Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri®
Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.
1Using Siri® Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
Siri® Eyes Free can be used only to play music from an
iPod.
(Talk) Button
Press and hold until the display changes as shown.
(Hang-up/back) Button
Press to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.
While in Siri® Eyes
Free:
The display remains
the same. No feedback
or commands appear.
Appears
when Siri is
activated
in Siri®
Eyes Free
273
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
(Home) Button: Press to go to the home
screen.
2 Switching the Display P. 138
(Back) Button: Press to go back to the
previous display when it is displayed.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons: Press to
change songs.
(Clock) Button
*
: Press to display the clock
screen.
(Map) Button
*
: Press to display the map
screen.
(Phone) Button: Press to display the
phone screen.
(Audio) Button: Press to display the
current audio information.
SOURCE Button: Press to display the source
select screen.
Selector Knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices.
Press to set your selection.
(Day/Night) Button: Press to change
the audio/information screen brightness.
Press once and select or to make
an adjustment.
u Each time you press , the mode
switches among the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate
the Selector Knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Selector Knob
When the list is not displayed, songs, frequency, etc.
can be changed.
While connected to Apple CarPlay, it changes as
follows:
•
Pressing the Phone Button, display the Apple
CarPlay phone screen.
•
Pressing the Audio Button, display the Apple
CarPlay audio screen.
Models with Display Audio
(Day/Night) Button
(Home) Button
(Back)
Button
(Audio) Button
Selector
Knob
(Phone) Button
SOURCE Button
/ (Seek/Skip)
Buttons
(Clock) Button
*
/
(Map) Button
*
* Not available on all models
274
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various
setup options.
■ Using the audio/information screen
Press the button to go to the home screen.
Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting All Apps.
■ Phone
Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 427
■
Switching the Display
1Audio/Information Screen
Touchscreen Operation
•
Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping,
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
•
Some items may be grayed out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction.
•
You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or
use voice commands.
•
Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.
2 Customized Features P. 381
Home Screen
Models without
navigation system
Models with
navigation system
(Home) Button
All Apps
275
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
■ Trip Computer
Displays the trip computer information.
• Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
• Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives.
The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B.
To reset the Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Delete Trip History.
To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select OK.
■ Clock
Displays the clock.
■ System Updates
Updates the software version of the audio system.
2 System Updates P. 286
■ FM/AM/SiriusXM
*
/USB1/USB2
*
/Bluetooth Audio/Smartphone Connection
Displays the each audio information.
■ Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 381
■ Navigation
*
Displays the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
* Not available on all models
276
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ HondaLink
Displays the HondaLink screen.
2 HondaLink® P. 321
■ Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto screen.
2 Apple CarPlay® P. 336
2 Android Auto
TM
P. 339
■ Messages
Displays the text message screen.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 427
■ AT&T Hotspot
*
Displays the AT&T Hotspot screen.
■ NFC Manager
*
Displays the Near Field Communication (NFC) manager screen.
2 Near Field Communication (NFC)
*
P. 332
■ Compass
*
Displays the compass screen.
* Not available on all models
Continued
277
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■ Import wallpaper
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port
in the center pocket or console
compartment
*
.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
2. Select Clock.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Clock Faces.
5. Select Add New Wallpaper.
u The Searching... screen is displayed.
6. Import a desired picture.
u Multiple pictures can be imported at the
same time.
7. Select Start Import.
u The display will return to the Clock Faces
screen.
■
Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be
displayed on the driver information interface.
•
The file name must be fewer than 255 characters.
•
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
•
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
•
Up to five pictures can be imported.
•
The maximum image size is 1,920 × 936 pixels. If
the image size is less the image is displayed in the
middle of the screen with the extra area appearing
in black.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
278
Features
■ Select wallpaper
1. Select Clock.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock Faces.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
5. Select Set.
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.
■ To view wallpaper once it is set
1. Press the button.
2. Select Clock.
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Select Clock.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock Faces.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
5. Select Delete.
6. Select Yes.
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.
1Wallpaper Setup
You cannot delete the initial imported wallpapers.
Continued
279
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ To change to a next screen
Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.
■
Home Screen
1Home Screen
The home screen has 2 or 3 pages. You can add up
to 7 pages.
Press the button to go directly back to the first
page of the home screen from any page.
Swipe
Icon
>
Icon
<
Current page position
<
>
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
280
Features
■ To add app icons on the home screen
App icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Press the button.
2. Select and hold the home screen.
3. Select Add.
4. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
5. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To add app icons on the home screen
You can add app icons by the following procedure.
1. Press the button.
2. Select All Apps.
3. Select Customize.
4. Select Add.
5. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to
be.
6. Select Done.
uThe screen will return to the home screen.
Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this
occurs, you need to reset the system.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 399
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all
the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 399
In case those apps still do not startup normally even
after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.
There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in
the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen
will return to before the browser startup.
Continued
281
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ To move icons on the home screen
You can change location on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
3. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To move icons on the home screen
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
282
Features
■ To remove icons on the home screen
You can delete the icons on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove
to the Hide icon.
u The icon is removed from the home
screen.
3. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To remove icons on the home screen
Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the
home screen.
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop to
Hide icon.
Continued
283
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ To shortcut icons on the home screen
You can store up to three icons on the upper left of the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon you want to store to
the upper left of the home screen.
u The icon is shortcut.
3. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To shortcut icons on the home screen
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Select and hold.
Drag and
drop to preset
icon.
Shortcut
Icons
284
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
1. Select the system status icon.
u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details.
3. Press the button or the system status
icon to close the area.
■
Status Area
System
Status Icon
Status Area
285
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
You can edit, show, or hide the meter contents on the driver information interface.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select Config. of Instrument Panel.
5. Select and hold the content you wish to
show or hide.
u The checked items are displayed on the
driver information interface.
■ Editing order
To change the order of the contents on the driver information interface, first select:
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select Config. of Instrument Panel.
5. Select Reorder.
6. Select and hold the contents you want to
move.
7. Drag and drop the contents to where you
want it to be.
8. Select Done.
■
Customizing the Meter
1Customizing the Meter
You can store up to three customized configurations.
To select or customize a configuration, select Select
configuration..
When you select Select configuration. during
customization, the settings you changed will be
saved.
286
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Features
System Updates
The audio system’s firmware can be updated with a Wi-Fi connection, or with a USB
device.
■ Wireless connection mode setup
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Connection Setup.
5. Select Wi-Fi.
6. Select Change Mode.
7. Select Network, then Confirm.
u The display returns to the network list.
8. Select an access point from the network list,
then Save.
u If the audio system requires a password,
enter a password.
■
How to Update Wirelessly
1Wireless connection mode setup
If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you
do not need the wireless connection mode setup.
Continued
287
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Features
■ How to update
When the audio system update is available, the notification is shown on the audio/
information screen. Use the following procedure to update the system.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select via Wireless.
u If a notification is displayed on the
screen, the screen of step 5 will be
displayed.
4. Select Download Now.
u A notification appears on the screen.
1How to update
You can update the system via Wi-Fi, but cannot use
the captive portal that require login or agreement the
terms of use on the browser.
Your download will be canceled if:
•
Your Wi-Fi connection is severed.
•
You turn off the ignition when the battery is low on
power.
Your download will recommence the next time a Wi-
Fi connection is established.
Notification
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
288
Features
5. Select Install Now or Install while
Vehicle OFF.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the update is successful.
1How to update
For battery protection, Install while Vehicle OFF
cannot be selected when the battery is low on power.
If you want to install the updated data, recharge the
battery or select Install Now.
289
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Continued
Features
■ Automatic download settings
Use the following procedure to change to the automatic download setting.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Auto Download.
5. Select the access point, then Yes.
■ View a version and update status
Use the following procedure to confirm the version and update status.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Version Status.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
290
Features
■ Download the update files from the server
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select via USB.
u A notification appears on the screen.
4. Connect a USB device into the USB port in
the center pocket or console
compartment
*
.
u The inventory data is copied into the USB
device.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
5. Remove the USB device from the USB port.
6. Connect the USB device into your
computer, and then download the update
files.
u Follow the link to download the required
software update files. Refer to
https://usb.honda.com for instructions.
■
How to Update with a USB Device
1How to Update with a USB Device
A USB device with a minimum of 8 GB of free space
or more is recommended.
Be sure to delete any previous inventory or update
files from the USB before starting the USB update
process.
* Not available on all models
291
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Features
■ Update the audio system
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select via USB.
u A notification appears on the screen.
4. Connect the USB device with the update
files into the USB port.
u A notification appears on the screen.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
5. Select Install Now.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the update is successful.
292
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Press the button.
2. Select an audio source icon.
3. Select Sound.
4. Select the setting you want.
5. Select Save.
Select an item from the following choices:
• Bass / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass
• Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader
• DTS Neural Surround
*
: DTS Neural
Surround
TM
• Speed Volume Compensation: Speed
Volume Compensation (SVC)
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC adjusts the volume level based on the
vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume
increases. As you slow down, audio volume
decreases.
You can also adjust the sound the following
procedure.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Sound.
To reset each setting for Bass / Treble, Balance /
Fader, DTS Neural Surround
*
and Speed Volume
Compensation select Default.
* Not available on all models
293
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Continued
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness of the audio/information screen.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Display.
4. Select Day Mode or Night Mode.
5. Select the setting you want.
6. Select Save.
■
Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
To reset the settings, select Default.
294
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list or use the
SOURCE button to switch the audio source.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
■
Selecting an Audio Source
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
*
Select the source icon
Source Select Screen
Source List Icons
SOURCE Button
* Not available on all models
295
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Continued
Features
Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation.
The voice control system uses the (talk) and (back) buttons on the steering
wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
The system recognizes only certain commands.
Available voice commands.
2 Voice Portal Screen P. 296
• Close the windows and moonroof
*
.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
• Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
■
Voice Recognition
1Voice Control Operation
When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.
* Not available on all models
296
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
When the (talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice
Help” after the beep.
The system only recognizes the commands
on the following pages, at certain screens.
Free form voice commands are not
recognized.
*1: Models with navigation system
■
Voice Portal Screen
This can be only used when the phone is
connected. When the system recognizes the
Phone command, the screen will change
the dedicated screen for the voice
recognition of the phone.
■ Phone Commands
• Phone
• Call <Your Contact Name>
• Call <Phone Number>
The system recognize an only contact name
in the stored phonebook of your phone. If
full name is registered in first name field,
the system will recognize the first name and
last name as one contact name.
Phone commands are not available if using
Apple CarPlay.
When the system recognizes the Audio
command, the screen will change the
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
of the audio.
■
Phone Commands
■
Audio Commands
■ FM Commands
• FM
• Tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
■ AM Commands
• AM
• Tune to <530-1710> AM
■ Sirius XM Commands
• Sirius XM
• Channel <1-999>
• Channel <station name>
■ USB Commands
• USB
• Play genre <Genre name>
• Play Artist <Artist name>
• Play Album <Album name>
• Play Playlist <Playlist name>
• Play Song <Song name>
• Play Music
• List Genre <Genre name>
• List Artist <Artist name>
• List Album <Album name>
• List Playlist <Playlist name>
297
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
The system accepts navigation command on
the dedicated screen for the voice
recognition of the navigation.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
• Voice Help
• Cancel
• Back
Voice Help are readout voice guidance for
Help on current screen.
■
Navigation Commands
*1
■
Standard Commands
298
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Seek Buttons
Press or to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Push to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Tune Icon
Select to use the on-screen keyboard for
entering the radio frequency directly.
Audio/Information Screen
Scan Icon
Select to scan each station with a strong signal.
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for
preset memory.
Select and hold the preset icon to
store that station. Select to
display beyond preset 5.
>
Settings Icon
Select whether to tune to HD
Radio
TM*
automatically.
Selector knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
Press, and then turn to select an item. After
that, press again to make your selection.
* Not available on all models
Continued
299
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.
1. Select Station List to display a list.
2. Select the station.
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select Station List to display a list.
2. Select Refresh.
■
Preset Memory
■
Station List
1Preset Memory
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Roll the left selector wheel or select the audio source
icon on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 248
You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset
memory.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license
from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio
TM
and the HD, HD Radio, and
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
Models with HD Radio
TM
feature
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
300
Features
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, select Stop or .
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the station.
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Refresh.
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, select Stop or .
■
Scan
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
301
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Displays the subchannel list when an HD Radio
TM
station is selected while listening to
an FM station.
1. Select HD Radio Channels.
2. Select the channel number.
Change the AM/FM settings.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select an option.
• HD Radio: Automatically choose a digital or an analog channel, or listen to
analog only.
• Artwork: Turns the artwork display on and off.
■
HD Subchannel
■
AM/FM Settings
Models with HD Radio
TM
feature
302
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Channel Icons
Select or to the previous or next channel.
Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Push to turn the audio system on and
off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Category Icons
Select or to display and select a SiriusXM® Radio category.
Audio/Information Screen
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for preset
memory. Select and hold the preset
icon to store that station. Select
to display beyond preset 5.
>
Album Art
Settings Icon
Select settings to display and
customize siriusXM settings.
Seek Buttons
Press or to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
Selector knob
Turn to change the channel.
Press, and then turn to select an
item. After that, press again to
make your selection.
* Not available on all models
Continued
303
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Tune Mode.
3. Select Channel or Category.
■
To Change the Tune Mode
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.
SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,
which can take about a minute. Once they have
loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make
your selections.
Switching the Audio Mode
Roll up or down to select Audio on the left selector
wheel or select the audio source icon on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 248
Tune Start:
When you change to a preset channel, a song being
played on that channel restarts from the beginning
with this function. This can be turned on or off by the
following procedure.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Tune Start.
3. Select ON or OFF.
To change a category, select Category icons, or
select More and then select Category List.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
304
Features
To store a channel:
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
■ Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
You can store up to 10 of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station.
2. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel.
3. Select Add to TuneMix or Create
TuneMix.
u A message appears if there are no
available presets.
■
Preset Memory
1Preset Memory
You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset
memory.
1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
TuneMix:
The multi-channel preset function can be turned on
or off by the following procedure.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select TuneMix.
3. Select ON or OFF.
When you want to replace the channel, select
Replace preset.
If you want to delete a channel, select Edit TuneMix,
and then select the channel you want to delete.
Continued
305
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected.
1. Select Category List.
2. Select Featured Favorite.
■
Listening to Featured Channels
1Listening to Featured Channels
Up to ten featured channels by SiriusXM® can be
displayed.
Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel
list.
To switch the sorting method, select Number or
Name on the upper right of the screen.
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for
entering the channel number directly.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
306
Features
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned
channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from
the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system
records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can
rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.
Move the position you want to replay by selecting or .
To play or pause on playback mode, select the play/pause icon.
■ Returning to real-time broadcast
Select and hold .
■
Replay Function
1Replay Function
The system starts storing broadcast in memory when
the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to
the program from that point.
You can no longer replay any program once the
power mode is turned off as it erases memory.
You can check how long the program has been
stored in memory from the audio/information screen.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will
automatically start deleting the oldest data.
(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is
behind the real-time broadcast
(B): Replayed segment
(C): Length stored in memory
(D): Play/Pause icon
Audio/Information Screen
(C) (B)
(A)
(D)
Continued
307
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
While listening to other channel, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from
your favorite teams.
■ To set up a favorite team
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Sports Notifications Setup.
3. Select Favorite Teams.
4. Select + Add Favorite Team.
5. Select a team.
■ To set up an alert message
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Sports Notifications Setup.
3. Select Notifications.
4. Select Game Notifications or SportsFlash Game Play Notifications.
5. Select Notifications.
6. Select ON.
7. Select a favorite team.
■
Live Sports Alert
1Live Sports Alert
The Pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert
function.
1To set up a favorite team
Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
308
Features
You can receive traffic and weather information.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Traffic & Weather Now Setup.
3. Select Selected City.
4. Select the region.
■
Traffic and Weather Information
1Traffic and Weather Information
When traffic and weather information is received, a
notification is displayed in the header area.
2 Status Area P. 284
Continued
309
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
You can view a channel schedule or receive a alert when your favorite program is
about to start.
■ To view a channel schedule
1. Select More.
2. Select Channel Schedule.
■ To set up an alert message
1. Select More.
2. Select Channel Schedule.
3. Select a program.
4. Select Set Program Alert.
5. Select Just Once or Everytime.
■
Channel Schedule
1Channel Schedule
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for
entering the channel number directly.
1To set up an alert message
The Pop-up appears and notifies you of an alert
function.
Selecting Just Once disables the alert feature next
time you turn the power mode to ON.
If you want to delete the alert, select Remove Alert.
To enable an alert message, change settings for the
alert function.
2 To enable the alert function P. 310
310
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
You can change settings for the alert function.
■ To enable the alert function
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Manage Program Alerts.
3. Select Notifications.
4. Select ON or OFF.
■ To remove an alert
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Manage Program Alerts.
3. Select Alerts Set.
4. Select on the alert you want to delete.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
■
Manage Program Alert
Continued
311
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds.
1. Select More.
2. Select Scan.
You can change a scan mode by the following procedure.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Scan Mode.
3. Select Channel or Preset.
To turn off scan, select Stop.
■
Scan
1Scan
The “Scan Songs in Presets” function is based on
TuneScan
TM
technology of SiriusXM®.
The “Featured Channels” function is based on
Featured Favorites
TM
technology of SiriusXM®.
TuneScan
TM
and Featured Favorites
TM
are registered
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
312
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
Change the SiriusXM settings.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select an option.
• Tune Mix: Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off.
• Tune Mode: Choose whether to group by category or channel number when
changing channels.
• Scan Mode: Select the scan mode from all channels or presets.
• Tune Start: Start the currently playing song at the beginning when you switch to
a music channel preset.
• Sports Notifications Setup: Set to receive sports alerts such as scores from your
favorite teams.
2 Live Sports Alert P. 307
• Traffic & Weather Now Setup: Set to receive traffic and weather information.
2 Traffic and Weather Information P. 308
• Manage Program Alerts: Change settings for the alert function.
2 Manage Program Alert P. 310
■
SiriusXM Settings
313
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Continued
Features
Playing an iPod
Using your USB connector, connect the iPod to the USB port(s), then select the USB
mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Track Buttons
Press or to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Push to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Cover Art
Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
Sound Icon
Select to display the sound
settings.
Shuffle Icon
Select to play all files in the current
category in random order.
Track Icons
Select or to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.
Browse Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat the current file.
Selector knob
Turn to change songs.
Press, and then turn to select an
item. After that, press again to
make your selection.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
314
Features
1. Select Browse.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists,
Albums, etc.).
3. Continue making selections until you find
the song of your choice.
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 343
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod
while the phone is connected to the audio system,
you may no longer be able to operate the same app
on the audio/information screen.
Reconnect the device if necessary.
If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/
USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the
phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay.
315
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.
■ Shuffle/Repeat
Select Shuffle or repeat icon repeatedly until a
desired mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle
Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle in Folder: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
Repeat
Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.
Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.
316
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays audio files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC
*1
format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port(s), then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Track Icons
Select or to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Push to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
Seek Buttons
Press or to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
Random Icon
Select to play all files in the
current category in random
order.
Sound Icon
Select to display the sound
settings.
Browse Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat the current file.
Selector knob
Turn to change files.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Continued
317
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
1. Select Browse.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists,
Albums, etc.).
3. Continue making selections until you find
the song of your choice.
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 348
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays The selected file cannot
be played, then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 343
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
318
Features
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file.
■ Random/Repeat
Select Random or repeat icon repeatedly until
a desired mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Random
Random off: Random mode to off.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random
order.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
Repeat
Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.
Repeat track: Repeats the current folder.
Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.
319
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Continued
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 432
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For
a list of compatible phones:
•
U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink
or call 1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-888-528-7876.
It may be illegal to perform some data device
functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.
The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be
different.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there may be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone
will be unavailable. However, you can have a second
previously paired phone stream Bluetooth® Audio by
selecting from the Bluetooth® device list.
2 Phone Setup P. 432
Audio/Information Screen
(Back) Button
Press to go back to
the previous
display.
VOL/ AUDIO
(Volume/
Power) Knob
Push to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust
the volume.
Play/Pause Icon
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is
connected to HFL.
Track Icons
Select or to change tracks.
Browse Icon
Select to display the
menu items.
Selector knob
Turn to change groups. Press, and
then turn to select an item. After
that, press again to make your
selection.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
320
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 432
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■ To pause or resume a file
Select the play/pause icon.
1. Select Browse.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
3. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
You can change the connected phone by selecting
Change Devices.
2 Phone Setup P. 432
■
Searching for Music
1Searching for Music
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
321
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Continued
Features
HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect
your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 330
2 Phone Setup P. 432
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink®.
■ To enable the HondaLink®
You need to allow the consent of the location service to enable the HondaLink®.
Disable: Does not allow this consent.
Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Shows
again next time.)
Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Never
show again.)
■
To Connect to HondaLink®
1HondaLink®
If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you
can use HondaLink® without connecting the phone.
The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most
iPhone and Android phones.
If the system is connected to the HondaLink® connect
app through Bluetooth® and another Bluetooth®
audio device is connected, the Bluetooth®
connection to the HondaLink® connect app will be
severed.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
322
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features
■ To link with HondaLink®
You may see the connection guide screen
after launching HondaLink® when there is no
connection available.
■ Connect
Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.
■ Help & Support
Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service
center.
■
HondaLink® Menu
323
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Continued
Features
■ Message
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.
1. A notification appears and notifies you of a
new message on the header area.
2. A notification is continuously displayed in
the header area until the new message is
read.
■
Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
Notification
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
324
Features
3. Select the system status icon to see the
messages.
4. Select a new message to open.
u If you have selected the update option
for HondaLink®, follow the directions on
the screen to complete the process.
1Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
When you update HondaLink®, you must keep the
engine running and maintain a constant connection
with HondaLink®.
If the update is interrupted, the system will
automatically resume the process. If, however, a
week has elapsed since the process was first
interrupted, you must repeat the process from the
beginning.
You can update HondaLink® by selecting Message
from Honda on the HondaLink® menu.
325
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service
*
Continued
Features
HondaLink® Service
*
Is a subscription-based service that provides convenient features such as voice
communication in case of emergency, online security, and one-on-one operator
assistance.
■ Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the HondaLink® operator. If
connected, information about your vehicle, its
location, and its condition can be sent to the
operator
*1
; you also can speak to the operator
when connected.
IMPORTANT: In a crash, HondaLink® will attempt to notify emergency services but
NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH
NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink® services at any time or for any
reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or
obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental
regulation.
*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not
be sent to the operator.
■
In Case of Emergency
1HondaLink® Service
*
HondaLink® also provides services you can operate
from the Internet or your smartphone.
To subscribe to HondaLink®, or to get more
information about all of its features, contact an
Honda dealer, or visit hondalink.honda.com
1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
operator if the battery level is low, the line is
disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
coverage.
You cannot use this emergency services when:
•
You travel outside the HondaLink® service coverage
areas.
•
There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions
using the screen while talking to the operator.
Only the operator can terminate the connection to
your vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service
*
326
Features
■ Manual operator connection
If you need to talk to the HondaLink® operator
in a situation where no airbag has deployed,
you can manually connect to them by pressing
the ASSIST button with the power mode in
ACCESSORY or ON.
1. Open the cover attached to the ceiling
console.
2. Press the ASSIST button.
u You are connected to the HondaLink®
operator.
1Manual operator connection
Do not press the button while driving. When you
need to contact the operator, park the vehicle in a
safe place.
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
automatically cancels the action after three minutes.
If necessary, the cover can be broken to access the
ASSIST button.
ASSIST
Button
Continued
327
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service
*
Features
Your subscribed telematics service provider can track your vehicle’s location,
remotely lock or unlock doors, and help you find your vehicle.
To use these features, you need your user ID and personal identification number
(PIN).
■ Stolen vehicle tracking
This feature searches and tracks down your vehicle position even if it is on the move.
If you believe that your vehicle has been stolen, contact the police as well as the
provider.
■ Remote door lock/unlock
The provider can remotely lock or unlock doors upon your request.
■ Vehicle finder
This feature is convenient to use when trying to locate your vehicle in large areas,
such as a crowded parking lot. If you cannot locate your vehicle after using the
remote transmitter’s answerback function, you can contact the provider which can
then flash your vehicle’s exterior lights and sound the horn, and sends vehicle
location via web/Smartphone.
■ Security alarm notification
If the security system in your vehicle detects an abnormal condition, such as
someone tampering with the lock on your vehicle, the provider notifies you by email.
■
Security Features
1Security Features
The contact information of your provider, your user
ID and PIN will be given when you subscribe to
HondaLink®. If you forget any of the above, contact a
Honda dealer, or go to hondalink.honda.com.
You can also activate the remote door lock/unlock
and vehicle finder features from the Internet or using
your smartphone app. Ask a dealer, or visit
hondalink.honda.com.
1Vehicle finder
The lights will stop flashing and horn will stop
sounding under the following:
•
When conditions 30 seconds have elapsed.
•
You unlock the doors using the remote transmitter.
•
You unlock the doors using the smart entry system.
•
You unlock the doors using the built-in key.
•
The power mode is set to ACCESSORY or ON.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service
*
328
Features
Connect to the HondaLink® operator when trying to find a destination or for
roadside assistance.
1. Press the LINK button.
u Connection to the operator begins.
2. Talk to the operator.
u To disconnect, select Hang Up on the
audio/information screen or press the
button on the steering wheel.
■
Operator Assistance
1Operator Assistance
Remain attentive to road conditions and driving
during operator assistance.
If you want to add or renew a subscription, call the
Operator Assistance.
1. Press the button.
2. Select HondaLink.
3. Select HondaLink Subscription Status.
LINK
Button
Audio/information screen
when connected to the
HondaLink® operator.
329
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service
*
Features
Your subscribed telematics service provider can check your vehicle’s condition.
■ Virtual Dashboard
You can remotely check the mileage, fuel range, and oil life in your app.
■ Remote Start and stop the engine
You can remotely start and stop engine using your app as same as the smart entry
key.
■ Geofence Alert
You can receive a notification anytime your vehicle enters or leaves a region set by
you.
■ Speed Alert
You can receive a notification when your vehicle has exceeded a speed limit set by
you.
■ Personal Data Wipe
You can reset your audio and navigation system settings to factory defaults with the
app.
■ Wi-Fi hotspot
Vehicle provides 4G LTE network environment as Wi-Fi router to use tablet or
smartphone in your vehicle.
■
Convenient Features
1Convenient Features
The contact information of your provider, your user
ID and PIN will be given when you subscribe to
HondaLink®. If you forget any of the above, contact a
Honda dealer, or go to hondalink.honda.com.
330
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Features
Wi-Fi Connection
You can connect the audio system to the Internet using Wi-Fi on the audio/
information screen. If your phone has wireless hotspot capabilities, the system can
be tethered to the phone. Use the following steps to setup.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Wi-Fi.
5. Select Change Mode.
6. Select Network or Hotspot, then
Confirm.
u To change the Wi-Fi settings, select
Network Options or HotSpot
Options.
u Select the access point you want to
connect to the system.
7. Select Connect.
u Enter a password for the access point,
and select Done.
u When the connection is successful, the
icon is displayed on the list.
8. Press the button to go back to the
home screen.
■
Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
1Wi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct a registered trademark of Wi-Fi
Alliance®.
1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
You cannot go through the setting procedure while a
vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the audio
system in Wi-Fi mode.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone
has Wi-Fi connectivity.
You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or
off with the icon on the Wi-Fi network list.
Transmission speed and others will not be displayed
on this screen.
In case of Wi-Fi connection with your phone, make
sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point
(tethering) mode.
331
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Features
Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.
■
Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi-Fi
connection again after you boot your phone.
iPhone users
332
uuAudio System Basic OperationuNear Field Communication (NFC)
*
Features
Near Field Communication (NFC)
*
Near Field Communication (NFC) allows you to connect your phone to the audio
system easily via Bluetooth®.
NFC enables two devices to communicate in close proximity, within about 0.6 inch
(15 mm).
The following features are available:
• Bluetooth® setup
• Image transfer for wallpaper
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select NFC, then ON.
5. Select Android Beam, then ON.
■
NFC Setup
1Near Field Communication (NFC)
*
To use the NFC function, your Android phone first
must be NFC compatible.
Check with the manual that came with your Android
phone to find out if your phone is NFC compatible.
The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of
NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States and in other
countries.
Android phone only
* Not available on all models
Continued
333
uuAudio System Basic OperationuNear Field Communication (NFC)
*
Features
1. Press the button then select NFC
Manager. Or touch the NFC logo near the
glove box with the NFC tag of your phone.
u The NFC Manager screen is displayed.
2. Select Connect Device to Vehicle
Bluetooth.
3. Touch the NFC logo near the glove box with
the NFC tag of your phone.
4. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
■
Bluetooth® Setup
1Bluetooth® Setup
To use the NFC function, you first need to set up your
Android phone to enable this function.
For instructions on how to use NFC with your
Android phone, refer to the manual that came with
your phone.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuNear Field Communication (NFC)
*
334
Features
1. Press the button.
2. Select NFC Manager or touch the NFC
logo near the glove box with the NFC tag of
your phone.
3. Select Transfer Image.
4. Open the photo you want to transfer on
your phone, then select Next.
5. Touch the NFC logo near the glove box with
the NFC tag of your phone.
6. Select the photo on your phone.
7. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Wallpaper.
■
Image Transfer for the Wallpaper
1Image Transfer for the Wallpaper
The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be
displayed on the driver information interface.
•
The file name must be fewer than 255 characters.
•
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
•
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
•
Up to five pictures can be imported.
•
The maximum image size is 1,920 × 936 pixels. If
the image size is less the image is displayed in the
middle of the screen with the extra area appearing
in black.
335
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free
Features
Siri® Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using to press and hold the (Talk) button on the steering
wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 432
■
Using Siri® Eyes Free
1Siri® Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
While driving we recommend only using Siri through
the button on the steering wheel (Siri Eyes Free).
1Using Siri® Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
(Talk) Button
Press and hold until the display
changes as shown.
(Back) Button
Press to deactivate Siri.
While in Siri Eyes Free:
The display remains the same.
No feedback or commands
appear.
Appears when Siri is
activated in Siri Eyes Free
336
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay®
Features
Apple CarPlay®
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the USB port
in the center pocket or console compartment
*
, you can use the audio/information
screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view
maps (navigation), and access messages.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
■ Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.
■ Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.
■ Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.
■
Apple CarPlay Menu
1Apple CarPlay®
Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later
are compatible with Apple CarPlay.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to
Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible
apps.
To use Apple CarPlay, connect the USB cable to the
USB port located in the center pocket or console
compartment
*
.
The USB ports located on the rear of the center
console
*
are used only for charging.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only
made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a
call with HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or
detach the USB cable from your iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 337
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is
not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other
previously paired phones can stream audio via
Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 432
For details on countries and regions where Apple
CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining
to function, refer to the Apple homepage.
Home screen
Apple CarPlay icon
Apple CarPlay menu screen
Go back to the Apple
CarPlay menu screen
Select the Honda icon
to go back to the
home screen
* Not available on all models
Continued
337
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay®
Features
■ Maps
Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your
iPhone.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the front USB port, use the
following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the
transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed,
and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need
to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen.
■ Enabling Apple CarPlay
Check the checkbox.
Enable: Allows this consent.
Disable: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under
the Connections settings menu.
■
Setting Up Apple CarPlay
1Apple CarPlay®
Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an
active cellular connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Apple
CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple
homepage for information on compatible apps.
Models with navigation system
1Setting Up Apple CarPlay
You can also use the method below to set up Apple
CarPlay:
Select HOME Settings Connections
Smartphone Connection Apple CarPlay Select
device Edit Device Permissions
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is
governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and
Apple’s Privacy Policy.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay®
338
Features
Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri.
■
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Below are examples of questions and commands for
Siri:
•
What movies are playing today?
•
Call dad at work.
•
What song is this?
•
How’s the weather tomorrow?
•
Read my latest email.
•
Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit
www.apple.com/ios/siri.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold to activate Siri.
Press again to deactivate Siri.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
339
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Continued
Features
Android Auto
TM
When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the front USB port,
Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can
use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation),
Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a
tutorial will appear on the screen.
We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using
Android Auto.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 341
1Android Auto
TM
To use Android Auto, you need to download the
Android Auto app from Google Play to your
smartphone.
Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are
compatible with Android Auto.
Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android Auto
phone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android
phone to Android Auto and when launching any
compatible apps.
To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the
USB port(s) located in the center pocket or the
console compartment
*
. The USB ports located on the
rear of the center console
*
will not enable Android
Auto operation.
2 USB Port(s) P. 245
To directly access the Android Auto phone function,
press Phone on the home screen.
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 341
When your Android phone is connected to Android
Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.
However, other previously paired phones can stream
audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is
connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 432
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
340
Features
a Maps (Navigation)
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your
Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard
entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other
inputs.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
The audio/Information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your
destination.
b Phone (Communication)
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
c Google Now (Home screen)
Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear
just when they’re needed.
■
Android Auto Menu
1Android Auto
TM
For details on countries and regions where Android
Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to
function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Android Auto Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone
with an active cellular connection and data plan.
Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Android
Auto functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Android Auto functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Android Auto performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android
Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.
: Go back to the
home screen
Android Auto icon
6
Models with navigation system
Continued
341
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
d Music and audio
Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto.
To switch between music apps, press this icon.
e Go back to the Home Screen.
f Voice
Operate Android Auto with your voice.
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the front USB port, Android
Auto is automatically initiated.
■ Enabling Android Auto
Check the checkbox.
Enable: Allows this consent.
Disable: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under
the Connections settings menu.
■
Auto Pairing Connection
1Enabling Android Auto
Only initialize Android Auto when you safely parked.
When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will
need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is
possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came
with your phone.
You can use the method below to change Android
Auto settings after you have completed the initial
setup:
Select HOME Settings Connections
Smartphone Connection Android Auto Select
device Edit Device Permissions
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is
governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
342
Features
Press and hold the talk button to operate Android Auto with your voice.
■
Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with
voice recognition:
•
Reply to text.
•
Call my wife.
•
Navigate to Honda.
•
Play my music.
•
Send a text message to my wife.
•
Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android
Auto homepage.
You can also activate the voice recognition function
by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of
the screen.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
343
Continued
Features
Audio Error Messages
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:Models with color audio
*2:Models with Display Audio
Error Message Solution
USB Error
Please check owners manual
*1
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn
the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the
error.
Unsupported Ver
*1
Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod
is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.
Connect Retry
*1, *2
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File
*1, *2
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported
format. This error message appears for about three seconds, then plays the next song.
No Song
*1
No Data
*2
Appears when the iPod is empty.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty.
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
*1, *2
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported
device is connected, reconnect the device.
Appears when unsupported formats are in the device. Check that compatible files are
stored on the device.
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
344
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Features
*1:Models with color audio
*2:Models with Display Audio
Error Message Solution
Device No Response
*1, *2
Appears when the system does not communicate with a connected device. If it appears
when a device is connected, contact your place of device purchase.
HUB Unsupported
*1
USB hub not supported
*2
Appears when only a HUB is connected. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the
HUB.
345
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Features
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
No Device Connected
Appears when no device is connected.
Check the Bluetooth® and USB connection.
No Data
Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot
the app and reconnect the device.
To begin listening, select a station from the stations list.
Appears when any station is not selected. Select a station from the
station list on the device.
PANDORA ver unsupport.
Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora®
to the latest version.
No station list on device.
Use device to create station.
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to
create a station.
PANDORA system maintenance. Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again later.
Unable to play PANDORA. When stopped, log-in to
PANDORA.
Appears you do not log in to Pandora®. Log in to Pandora®.
No network connectivity.
Appears when the network is deteriorated. Move the vehicle and
check the reception of the signal.
Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again later.
Appears when the sending the data is failed for ten times and the
device may have a malfunction. Try again later. Move the vehicle and
check the reception of the signal.
Models with color audio
346
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Features
Unable to play PANDORA. Music licensing restricts play in
this area.
Appears when the vehicle is in the restricted area to listen the music.
Move the vehicle and check the reception of the signal.
USB Error
Please check owners manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. If there is any
problem with the connected device itself, the audio system may not
be able to detect it. Contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
347
uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps
Features
Android/Apps
If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error
occurs.
Error Message Solution
Unfortunately, **** has
stopped.
*1
Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.
**** is not responding.
Would you like to close
it?
*1
App is not responding.
Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep
waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data
Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 399
Models with Display Audio
348
Features
General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service
*
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the screen, select Channel to 0.
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to
subscribe.
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering
wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30
minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with
good reception.
Channel **** is not subscribed. Call SiriusXM to subscribe.
*1
You are not subscribed to the channel selected.
Subscription updated:
SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
Channel Not Available:
No such channel exits, or the artist or title information is unavailable.
No Signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Check Tuner:
There is a problem with the SiriusXM® tuner. Contact a dealer.
Check Antenna:
There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
*1: ****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an subscribe.
■
Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
■
Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
■
SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Models with Display Audio
1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
•
US: SiriusXM® Radio at
www.siriusxm.com/subscribenow or 1-855-236-
9236
•
Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at
www.siriusxm.ca/subscribe-now, or 1-877-209-
0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
•
In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
•
In tunnels
•
On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
•
Large items carried on the roof rack
* Not available on all models
349
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Features
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
• A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
• Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
■
iPod, and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2007 and 2012
iPhone/iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s/
iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus
Model
iPod touch (5th to 6th generation) released between 2012 and 2015
iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5c/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6S/
iPhone 6S Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus
■
USB Flash Drives
1iPod, and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
Models with color audio
Models with Display Audio
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
350
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement
Features
Honda App License Agreement
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND
CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL
SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR
OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919
TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND
ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A
THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S
PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.
A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE
during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The
SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content
provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through
the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.
B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.
1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a)
as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a
DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the
“HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your
VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be
specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while
you are using the SOFTWARE.
■
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
351
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source
licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors
of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such
software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone.
Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual
or within the SOFTWARE.
4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER
TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or
permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants,
conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information,
targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any
applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.
(a) Limited License.
You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance
with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA
(any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to
you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under
the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
352
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement
Features
(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device
other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying
DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This
AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors,
affiliates, or suppliers.
(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation,
HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or
any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER
TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;
(2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
(3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES in any way;
(4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;
(5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver
distraction laws, rules or regulations;
(6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions,
and privacy policies; or
(7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile,
or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software
licenses.
353
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export
jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other
governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation
1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in
violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation.
The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their
jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by
their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any
information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal
information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE.
Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require
that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER
SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control
over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the
inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER
SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER
SERVICES.
4. Links to Third Party Sites:
The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable,
directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of
such websites and content.
354
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement
Features
5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and
SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge
and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and
PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any
fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such
measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
6. SOFTWARE Updates.
The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-
air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be
updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other
applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE.
Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not
provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and
VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings
1. Vehicle Geolocation Information.
You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The
traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude),
travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION
INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to
provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts,
or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
355
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls,
routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency
services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such
navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
3. Speech Recognition:
You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands
when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a)
consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA
and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors
are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address
any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
4. Distraction Hazards.
Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert
data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such
interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of
the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in
a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable
to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
356
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement
Features
E. Information Collection and Storage
1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may
collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services.
HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services
suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you.
HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally identifies you.
2. Information Storage.
Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease
of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved
destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
(a) Vehicle Health Information.
Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE
(“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and
malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows,
battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes,
diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA
for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period
of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based).
If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data
(latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is
at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information
uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and
safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
357
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you
will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result
from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-
infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your
use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely
on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We
do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via
the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the
accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via
the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may
not apply to you.
G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.
1. Limitations on YOUR liability.
HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s
fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW
ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
358
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement
Features
2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential,
indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including,
without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does
not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such
states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for
any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you,
and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA
or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES
interruptions of any length.
(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS
For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA,
PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in
connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the
total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence,
strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE
or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN
DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS
LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND
AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO
ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has
ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone
making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your
VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.
359
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia
system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within
the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission
limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of
or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any
portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance
degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given
location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy
shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA
instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact
HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
K. Termination and Transfer.
1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason,
and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to
comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided
you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed
materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or
transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
360
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement
Features
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless
explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall
respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from
time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion
thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification,
suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.
M. ARBITRATION:
PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU
MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE
HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE
MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.
Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to
court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and
conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the
Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration.
YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third
party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any
representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek
remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.
YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact
these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written
submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers,
HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator
may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.
361
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement
Features
N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional
HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this
AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole
remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the
balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as
explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of
California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of
another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of
the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not
prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included
for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.
Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow
substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of
this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall
include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.
This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is
unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely
unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at
Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after
providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.
362
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Features
Models with Display Audio
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE
APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE
SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER
LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND
VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR
DETAILS REGARDING APPLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.
USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN
THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE
DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED,
STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING,
FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS
SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE
POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF
DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.
■
OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
363
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Features
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR
SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS
PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS,
EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED
TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR
AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST
AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE
PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE,
SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC.,
SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY
TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY
(CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED
BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING
LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
■
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
364
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uAbout Open Source Licenses
Features
About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select License, then press .
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select About.
5. Select Legal Information.
6. Select License.
1About Open Source Licenses
Free/Open Source Software Information
This product contains Free/Open Source
Software(FOSS).
The license information and/or the source code of
such FOSS can be found at the following URL.
https://www.denso.com/global/en/opensource/tcu/
honda/
Models with Telematics Control Unit
Models with color audio
Models with Display Audio
365
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
*
Continued
Features
License Information
*
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Pro
Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS
Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
■
DOLBY DIGITAL
■
DTS
* Not available on all models
366
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uLicense Information
*
Features
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PANASONIC CORPORATION is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or
distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from Microsoft.
■
Bluetooth
■
Windows Media
367
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
*
Continued
Features
“Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone,” mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not
responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone,
may affect wireless performance.
Apple, the Apple Logo, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. Apple CarPlay, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
■
Apple
368
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uLicense Information
*
Features
Mpeg4 Visual
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD
(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO
PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY
OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO
PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
VC-1
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO
IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (“VC-1 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE
VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
■
MPEG
369
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
*
Features
AVC/H.264
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE
AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
■
SDHC Memory Card
370
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the
MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings,
press the button, then select Phone Setup.
1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
•
Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
•
Shift to (P.
Models with color audio
1How to customize
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
To customize other features, select Settings, rotate
, and press .
2 List of customizable options P. 388
Audio/Information Screen
(Phone) Button
371
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■ Customization Flow
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Adjust Clock
Settings
Bluetooth Setup Add New Device
Connect an Audio Device
Display Adjustment Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Rear Camera Fixed Guideline
RDS Settings
*1
RDS Information
Radio Text
*1: FM mode
Dynamic Guideline
Display Change Audio
Current Drive
History of Trip A
Clock/Wallpaper
History of Trip A Delete History
Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock
Wallpaper
372
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Color Theme Blue
Red
Amber
Violet
Language
Clock Format 12h
24h
License
Bluegreen
Header Clock Display On
Off
Vehicle Settings TPMS Calibration
Driver Assist System Setup
Meter Setup
Default
Lighting Setup
Door/Window Setup
373
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Press the button and rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Ringtone Mobile Phone
Fixed
Bluetooth Setup Add New Device
Connect a Phone
Connect an Audio Device
Disconnect All Devices
Delete Device
Pass-Key
Speed Dial
System Clear
Auto Transfer
374
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■ List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Adjust Clock
Adjust Clock.
2 Clock P. 164
—
Settings
RDS
Settings
RDS Information
Selects whether the RDS information comes
on.
On
*1
/Off
Radio Text
Displays the radio text information of the
selected RDS station.
—
Bluetooth
Setup
Add New Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a code for a paired
phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 409
—
Connect an Audio
Device
Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.
—
Display
Adjustment
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/
information screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/
information screen.
—
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/
information screen.
—
Rear
Camera
Fixed Guideline
Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on
the audio/information screen.
On
*1
/Off
Dynamic Guideline
Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come
on the audio/information screen.
On
*1
/Off
FM mode
375
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Settings
Display Change Changes the display type.
Audio
*1
/Clock/Wallpaper/
Current Drive/History of
Trip A
History of
Trip A
Delete History Resets the trip meter. Yes/No
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Changes the clock display type. Analog
*1
/Off
Wallpaper
Select Changes the wallpaper type.
Blank
*1
/Image 1/Image 2/
Image 3
Import
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 255
—
Delete Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Image 1/Image 2/Image 3
Color Theme
Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen.
Blue
*1
/Red/Amber/Violet/
Bluegreen
Language Changes the display language. English
*1
/Français/Español
Header Clock Display
Selects whether the header clock display
comes on.
On
*1
/Off
Clock Format
Selects the digital clock display from 12H to
24H.
12h
*1
/24h
376
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Settings
Vehicle
Settings
TPMS
Calibration
Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
Cancel
*1
/Calibrate
Driver Assist
System
Setup
Forward
Collision
Warning
Distance
Changes CMBS
TM
alert distance. Long/Normal
*1
/Short
ACC
Forward
Vehicle
Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system
detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out
of the ACC with LSF range.
On/Off
*1
Road
Departure
Mitigation
Setting
Changes the setting for the road departure
mitigation system.
Normal
*1
/Wide/Warning
Only/Narrow
Lane
Keeping
Assist
Suspend
Beep
Causes the system to beep when LKAS is
suspended.
On/Off
*1
Traffic Sign
Recognition
System
Displays traffic sign icon on the driver
information interface.
Small Icon On
*1
/Small Icon
Off
Driver
Attention
Monitor
Changes the setting for the driver attention
monitor.
Tactile and Audible Alert
*1
/
Tactile Alert/Off
377
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Meter Setup
Language
Selection
Changes the displayed language. English
*1
/Français/Español
Adjust
Outside
Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few
degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F
“Trip A”
Reset
Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter
A and average fuel economy A.
When Fully Refueled/IGN
Off/Manually Reset
*1
“Trip B”
Reset
Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter
B and average fuel economy B.
When Fully Refueled/IGN
Off/Manually Reset
*1
Adjust
Alarm
Volume
Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers,
warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.
High/Mid
*1
/Low
Fuel
Efficiency
Backlight
Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
Speed/
Distance
Units
Selects the trip computer units. mph · miles
*1
/km/h · km
Tachometer
Selects whether the tachometer come on the
driver information interface.
On/Off
*1
378
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Lighting
Setup
Interior
Light
Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights
stay on after you close the doors.
60seconds/30seconds
*1
/
15seconds
Headlight
Auto OFF
Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.
60seconds/30seconds/
15seconds
*1
/0seconds
Auto Light
Sensitivity
Changes the timing for the headlights to
come on.
Max/High/Mid
*1
/Low/Min
Auto
Interior
Illumination
Sensitivity
Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of
the instrument panel when the headlight
switch is in the AUTO position.
Min/Low/Mid
*1
/High/Max
Headlight
Integration
Wiper
Changes the settings for the wiper operation
when the headlights automatically come on
while the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position.
On
*1
/Off
379
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Door/
Window
Setup
Auto Door
Lock
Used to change the setting for when the
doors automatically lock.
With Vehicle Speed
*1
/Shift
from P/Off
Auto Door
Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors
unlock automatically.
All Doors When Driver’s
Door Opens
*1
/All Doors
When Shifted to Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Key and
Remote
Unlock
Mode
Sets up the driver’s door or all the doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.
Driver Door
*1
/All Doors
Keyless Lock
Answer
Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On
*1
/Off
Security
Relock
Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to
relock and the security system to set after you
unlock the vehicle without opening any door.
90seconds/60seconds/
30seconds
*1
Default
Resets the vehicle settings to the factory
defaults.
Yes/No
License Shows the legal information. —
380
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Setup
Bluetooth
Setup
Add New Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 409
—
Connect a Phone
Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone
to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 409
—
Connect an Audio
Device
Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL. —
Disconnect All Devices Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. —
Delete Device Deletes a paired phone. —
Pass-Key Inputs and changes a code for a paired phone. —
Speed Dial
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Speed Dial P. 418
—
Ringtone Selects the ring tone. Mobile Phone
*1
/Fixed
Auto Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
On
*1
/Off
System Clear
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Phone Setup group as default.
—
381
Continued
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
With the power mode in ON, select Settings, then select a setting item.
1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
•
Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
•
Shift to (P.
•
Set the parking brake.
To customize other features, select Settings.
2 List of customizable options P. 388
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission models
Models with Display Audio
Audio/Information Screen
382
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■ Customization flow
Select Settings.
Automatic Date &
Time
Set Date
Set Time
System
Press the button.
Automatic Time
Zone
*
Time Format
Time Zone
Set Date & Time
Touch Panel
Sensitivity
System Volumes
Config. of
Instrument Panel
Security
Day & Time
(Select time zone)
Language
Auto Daylight Saving
Time
Date Format
Verbal Reminder
System Volumes
Reading/Warning
Unknown sources
Password
Select configuration
* Not available on all models
383
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Caption
Language
Caption style
Detail
Information
Factory Data
Reset
About
Refuel
recommend
*
Accessibility
Status
Legal Information
App Manager
Recent Location
Requests Apps
Caption
Text-to-speech output
Text Size
* Not available on all models
384
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Connections
+ Connect New Device
(Saved Devices)
Change Mode
Smartphone
Connection
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
NFC
*
(Available Networks/Connected Devices)
Android Beam
*
Apple CarPlay
Android Auto
Display
Sound
Day Mode
Night Mode
Treble
Subwoofer
*
Bass / Treble
Speed Volume
Compensation
Balance / Fader
DTS Neural
Surround
*
Midrange
Bass
* Not available on all models
385
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Vehicle
Meter Setup
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Reverse Alert Tone
*
Config. of Instrument Panel
Adjust Alarm Volume
Turn By Turn Auto Display
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
TPMS Calibration
Driver Assist
System Setup
Blind Spot Info
*
Head-up Warning
*
Traffic Sign Recognition System
Forward Collision Warning Distance
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Driver Attention Monitor
Speed/Distance Units
Tachometer
Language Selection
* Not available on all models
386
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Lighting Setup
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto OFF Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Door/Window
Setup
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Info.
Select Reset Items
Walk Away Auto Lock
*
Driving Position
Setup
*
Seat Position Movement at Entry/Exit
Memory Position Link
Keyless Access
Setup
Door Unlock Mode
Smart Entry Light Flash
*
Smart Entry Beep
*
Remote Start System ON/OFF
*
Auto Headlight On with Wiper On
Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity
* Not available on all models
387
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Camera
Show with turn signalLaneWatch
*
Show Reference Line
Rear Camera Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Cross Traffic
Monitor
*
Display Time after Turn Signal Off
* Not available on all models
388
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■ List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Day & Time
Set
Date &
Time
Automatic
Date &
Time
Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust
the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.
ON
*1
/OFF
Set Date
Adjusts date.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 164
—
Set Time
Adjusts clock.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 164
—
Time
Zone
Automatic
Time Zone
*
Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust
the clock when driving through different time
zones.
ON
*1
/OFF
(Select time
zone)
Changes the time zone manually. —
Auto Daylight Saving
Time
Select ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the
clock to daylight savings time. Select OFF to cancel
this function.
ON
*1
/OFF
Date Format Sets the date format.
MM/DD/YYYY
*1
/
DD/MM/YYYY/
YYYY/MM/DD
Time Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H
*1
/24H
* Not available on all models
389
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Language Changes the display language.
English (United
States)
*1
/Spanish/
French/
Touch Panel
Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Normal
*1
System
Volumes
System Volumes Changes the system sounds volume. —
Reading/
Warning
Verbal
Reminder
Turns the verbal reminders on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Config. of
Instrument
Panel
Select configuration
Selects whether the apps display comes on or not
on the driver information interface.
Config.1
*1
/Config.2/
Config.3
Security
Password Set the value of password display. ON
*1
/OFF
Unknown sources — ON/OFF
*1
* Not available on all models
390
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Accessibility
Caption
Caption Turns the subtitles on and off. ON/OFF
*1
Language Change the subtitle language.
Default
*1
/English
(United States)/
Spanish/French
Text Size Change the subtitle Text Size.
Very small/Small/
Normal
*1
/Large
Caption
style
Change the subtitle Caption style.
Use app defaults
*1
/
White on black/
Black on white/
Yellow on black/
Yellow on blue/
Custom
Text-to-
speech
output
Current
TTS
engine
TtsService
TtsService — —
Refuel
recommend
*
Turns the refuel recommend function on and off.
2 Refuel Recommend P. 452
ON
*1
/OFF
About
Status
Displays the Android setting items. —
Legal Information
* Not available on all models
391
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Factory Data
Reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 399
Continue/Cancel
Detail
Information
App Manager
Displays the Android system memory and apps
information.
—
Recent Location
Requests Apps
Displays the recent location requests from apps. —
Connec-
tions
Wi-Fi
Change Mode Changes the Wi-Fi mode.
Network
*1
/Hotspot/
OFF
(Available Networks/
Connected Devices)
Displays the available network(s) or current
connected device(s).
—
Bluetooth
+ Connect New
Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 432
—
(Saved Devices)
Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 432
—
Smartphone
Connection
Apple CarPlay Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection. —
Android Auto Sets up the Android Auto connection. —
NFC
*
Turns the NFC function on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Android Beam
*
Turns the NFC connection on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
* Not available on all models
392
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Display
Day Mode Adjusts the settings of the audio/information
screen.
2 Display Setup P. 258
—
Night Mode
Sound
Bass / Treble
Treble
Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’ sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 292
—
Midrange
Bass
Subwoofer
*
Balance / Fader
DTS Neural Surround
*
Speed Volume Compensation
Vehicle
TPMS Calibration
Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS).
Calibrate/Cancel
Driver Assist
System Setup
Blind Spot Info
*
Changes the setting for the blind spot information.
Audible And Visual
Alert
*1
/Visual Alert
Head-up Warning
*
Turns the head-up warning on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Traffic Sign
Recognition System
Select On/Off to indicate small displaying traffic
sign icon on the driver information interface and
the head-up display
*
.
Small Icons ON
*1
/
Small Icons OFF
* Not available on all models
393
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Driver Assist
System Setup
Forward Collision
Warning Distance
Changes Collision Mitigation Braking System
(CMBS
TM
) alert distance.
Normal
*1
/Short/
Long
ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system
detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of
the ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
range.
ON/OFF
*1
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep
Causes the system to beep when Lane Keeping
Assist System (LKAS) is suspended.
ON/OFF
*1
Road Departure
Mitigation Setting
Changes the setting for the road departure
mitigation system.
Normal
*1
/Wide/
Warning Only/
Narrow
Driver Attention
Monitor
Changes the setting for the driver attention
monitor.
OFF/Tactile Alert/
Tactile And Audible
Alert
*1
Meter Setup
Language Selection Changes the display language.
English
*1
/Français/
Español
Adjust Outside
Temp. Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C
(Canada)
Adjust Alarm Volume
Changes the alarm volume, such as the buzzers,
warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.
High/Mid
*1
/Low
Reverse Alert Tone
*
Turns the reverse alert tone on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
* Not available on all models
394
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Meter Setup
Config. of
Instrument Panel
Selects whether the apps display comes on or not
on the driver information interface.
Config.1
*1
/Config.2/
Config.3
Fuel Efficiency
Backlight
Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A
and average fuel economy A.
When Fully
Refueled/Manually
Reset
*1
/IGN OFF
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B
and average fuel economy B.
When Fully
Refueled/Manually
Reset
*1
/IGN OFF
Tachometer
Selects whether the tachometer come on the driver
information interface.
ON/OFF
*1
Speed/Distance Units Selects the trip computer units.
km/h · km/mph ·
miles
*1
(U.S.)
km/h · km
*1
/mph ·
miles (Canada)
Turn By Turn Auto
Display
Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on
during the route guidance.
ON
*1
/OFF
395
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Driving
Position
Setup
*
Memory Position
Link
Turns the driving position memory system on and
off.
ON
*1
/OFF
Seat Position
Movement at Entry/
Exit
Moves the seat rearward when you get in/get out
of the vehicle. Changes the setting for this feature.
ON
*1
/OFF
Keyless Access
Setup
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only
*1
/
All Doors
Smart Entry Light
Flash
*
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you
unlock/lock the doors.
ON
*1
/OFF
Smart Entry Beep
*
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock
the doors.
ON
*1
/OFF
Remote Start System
ON/OFF
*
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
* Not available on all models
396
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Lighting
Setup
Headlight Auto OFF
Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver’s door.
0 sec/15 sec
*1
/30 sec/
60 sec
Interior Light
Dimming Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.
15 sec/30 sec
*1
/60
sec
Auto Light
Sensitivity
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Min/Low/Mid
*1
/
High/Max
Auto Interior
Illumination
Sensitivity
Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the
instrument panel when the headlight switch is in
AUTO.
Min/Low/Mid
*1
/
High/Max
Auto Headlight On
with Wiper On
Used to automatically come on the headlights
when the wipers are used several times within a
certain number of intervals with the headlight
switch is in AUTO.
ON
*1
/OFF
397
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
*2:Except Manual transmission models
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Door/Window
Setup
Auto Door Lock
Changes the setting for the automatic locking
feature.
OFF/With Vehicle
Speed
*1
/Shift From P
Key and Remote
Unlock Mode
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote or built-in
key.
Driver Door Only
*1
/
All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer
Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
ON
*1
/OFF
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.
30sec
*1
/60sec/90sec
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.
OFF/All Doors When
Driver’s Door
Opens
*1
/All Doors
When Shifted to
Park
*2
/All Doors
With IGN OFF
Walk Away Auto
Lock
*
Changes the settings for the auto lock function
when you walk away from the vehicle.
ON/OFF
*1
Maintenance
Info.
Select Reset Items
Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.
—
* Not available on all models
398
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera
Rear Camera
Fixed Guideline
Selects whether the guidelines come on the rear
camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 594
ON
*1
/OFF
Dynamic Guideline
Selects whether the guidelines come on the rear
camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 594
ON
*1
/OFF
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Turns the cross traffic monitor on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
LaneWatch
*
Show with turn
signal
Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a
right turn.
ON
*1
/OFF
Display Time after
Turn Signal Off
Changes the length of time the LaneWatch display
stays on after the turn signal lever returns to the
center.
0 second
*1
/2
seconds
Show Reference Line
Selects whether the reference lines come on the
LaneWatch monitor.
ON
*1
/OFF
* Not available on all models
399
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen.
5. Select Continue to reset the settings.
6. Select Continue again to reset the settings.
u The system will reboot.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Vehicle.
4. Select Default.
5. Select Yes.
■
Defaulting System Settings
Models with Display Audio
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the
preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use
the HondaLink® because it becomes off line.
2 HondaLink® P. 321
■
Defaulting Vehicle Settings
400
Features
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path.
■
Important Safety Precautions
1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
* Not available on all models
401
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
uTraining HomeLink
Continued
Features
Training HomeLink
If it is necessary to erase a previously entered
learned code:
• Press and hold the I and III HomeLink
buttons for about 10 seconds, until the
green indicator blinks. Release the buttons,
and proceed to step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.
The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but
may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener,
visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.
Indicator
I HomeLink
Button
III HomeLink Button
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
uTraining HomeLink
402
Features
■
Programming a Button
1Training HomeLink
Reprogramming a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:
Erasing Button Memory
To erase programming from the buttons, press and hold
the two outside HomeLink buttons until the HomeLink
indicator changes from
orange to rapidly flashing green
.
This should take about 10 seconds. You should erase all
programming before selling the vehicle.
Operating
To operate, simple press and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now
occur for the trained device.
Questions
For questions or comments, visit
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink Hotline
(North America only) at (800) 355-3515.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
2.
1.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until
the HomeLink indicator begins to slowly flash
orange. This should take about 20 seconds.
Release the HomeLink button and position the
remote transmitter you wish to link 1 - 3 inches
(3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to
program, then follow steps 3 - 6 under
“programming a button.”
Training
Complete
HomeLink LED is
continuously on green.
YES
YES
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the
HomeLink® button you want to program.
3b.
Canadian Garage Door Opener
A. Press and release the HomeLink
button. Press, hold and release the
button on the remote every 2 secs.
Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)
change from slowly flashing orange to
rapidly flashing or continuously on
green? The process should take less
than 60 seconds.
NO
2.
Press and release the desired HomeLink button. Is the HomeLink indicator (LED) slowly
flashing orange?
NO
3a. Hold the button on the remote
transmitter. Does HomeLink indicator
(LED) change from slowly flashing
orange to rapidly flashing green or
continuously on green? The process
should take less than 60 seconds.
5.
Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
HomeLink indicator rapidly flashes
green.
5a.
The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).
6. Press and hold the HomeLink button
again.
The remote-controlled device should
operate.
Training Complete
5b.
Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2
secs.
4.
Press and hold the programmed HomeLink
button for about a second. Does the device
(garage door opener) work?
403
Continued
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
(Phone) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
•
U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/
or call 1-888-528 -7876.
•
Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-888-528 -7876.
Voice control tips
•
Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
•
Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak
clearly and naturally after a beep.
•
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
•
To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the
system resumes its operation after ending the call.
Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is
no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 418
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call
history, Call History is disabled.
Models with color audio
(Talk) Button
Microphone
(Hang-up/Back) Button
(Pick-up) Button
Selector Knob
(Phone) Button
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
404
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you
when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while
the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 418
■
HFL Status Display
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Signal Strength
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
Roam Status
Call Name
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 370
405
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
or
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Speed Dial
*1
Add New
Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.
Call History
Phonebook
Select a phone number from the phonebook to
store as a speed dial number.
Phone Number
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.
Dialed Calls
Received Calls
Missed Calls
Phonebook
*1
Dial
*1
Call History
*1
Display the phonebook of the paired phone.
Enter a phone number to dial.
(Existing entry list)
406
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
Add New Device
Connect a Phone
Connect an Audio Device
Bluetooth SetupPhone Setup
Redial
*1
Pair a phone to the system.
Connect a phone to the system.
Create a code for a paired phone.
Disconnect All Devices
Delete Device
Pass-Key
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Delete a previously paired phone.
Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the
system.
407
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Call History
Phonebook
Phone Number
Speed Dial
*1
Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Change Voice Tag
Delete Voice Tag
Change a previously stored speed dial
number.
Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Add New
Existing entry list
408
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Fixed
Mobile Phone
System Clear
Ringtone
Select the ring tone stored in the connected
cell phone.
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries,
and security codes.
Select the ring tone stored in HFL.
Auto Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL
when you enter the vehicle.
Continued
409
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (No phone has
been paired to the system)
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.
■
Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•
You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•
Up to six phones can be paired.
•
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
•
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
410
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Press the button or the button.
u If a prompt appears asking to connect to
a phone, select No and proceed with
step 2.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup,
then press .
4. Rotate to select Add New Device,
then press .
u The screen changes to device list.
411
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
5. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
6. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
7. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by a phone.
412
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To change the currently paired phone
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Connect a Phone,
then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate to select a desired device name,
then press .
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
413
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Pass-Key, then press
.
5. Input a new pairing code, then press .
414
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Delete Device, then
press .
u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
6. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press
.
Continued
415
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Ringtone, then press
.
4. Rotate to select Mobile Phone or
Fixed, then press .
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Auto Transfer, then
press .
4. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
■
Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Mobile Phone: For certain connected phones, the
ring tone stored in the phone sounds from the
speakers.
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.
■
Automatic Transferring
416
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Pairing codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, all call
history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select System Clear, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press
.
6. A notification appears on the screen. Press
.
■
To Clear the System
Continued
417
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to HFL.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
If a name has four or more numbers, ... appears
instead of category icons.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Pager
Work
Fax
Car
Voice
Other
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
418
Features
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Add New, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Phonebook:
u Select a number from the connected cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
From Phone Number:
u Input the number manually.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate to select Yes or No,
then press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
say the name for the speed dial entry.
■
Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, you can press the
button and call the number using voice commands.
419
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To edit a speed dial
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Change Speed Dial,
then press .
6. Select a new speed dial number, then press
.
■ To delete a speed dial number
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial,
then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
420
Features
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then
press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
■ To change a voice tag
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Change Voice Tag,
then press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
Continued
421
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
422
Features
■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook are automatically imported to
HFL.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then
press .
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate to select the initial, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate to select , then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 404
2 Speed Dial P. 418
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 404
2 Speed Dial P. 418
Continued
423
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s call history.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is
connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed,
received, or missed calls.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
424
Features
■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Select Others to view another paired phone’s speed
dial list.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button and
call the number using voice commands.
2 Speed Dial P. 418
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen. Press the button and
follow the prompts.
Continued
425
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds and the Incoming Call
screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the call.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold
to answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the and buttons. Rotate
to select the icon, then press .
HFL Mode
Caller’s Name
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
426
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the
button.
2. Rotate to select the option, then press
.
u The check box is checked when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Dial Tones: Available on some phones.
427
Continued
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
•
U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-888-528-7876.
To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be
ON.
2 Phone Setup P. 432
Voice control tips
•
Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphones.
•
Press the button when you want to call a
number using a phonebook name or a number.
Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
•
If the microphones pick up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
•
To change the volume level, select the audio
system’s VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio
controls on the steering wheel.
If there is no Favorite Contact entry in the system, the
pop-up notification appears on the screen.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 437
Models with Display Audio
(Talk) Button
Microphone
(Hang-up) Button
(Pick-up) Button
(Back) Button
(home) Button
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
Left Selector Wheel
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
428
Features
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone menu on the driver
information interface, or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call.
(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous screen, or cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal.
Left Selector Wheel: Press the (home) button, then roll up or down to select
Phone on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.
(home) button: Press to go back to the home screen of the driver information
interface.
To go to the phone screen of the driver information interface:
1. Press the (home) button on the steering wheel.
2. Select Phone.
u You can select Favorite Contacts or Recent Calls.
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
429
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uUsing HFL
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored phonebook names or numbers can be called using voice
commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 437
■
HFL Status Display
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
*
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is
connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Caller’s Name
(If registered)/
Caller’s Number
(If not registered)
* Not available on all models
430
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.
■ Phone settings screen
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Settings.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving.
Change Devices
(Existing entry list)
+ Connect New Device
Pair a new phone to the system.
Connect, disconnect, or delete a paired device.
Ringtone
Select the ring tone.
Auto Sync Phone
Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
Auto Phone Call Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
HondaLink Assist
*
Turn HondaLink® Assist on and off.
* Not available on all models
431
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ Phone menu screen
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.
Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Recent Calls
Favorite Contacts
All
Dialed
Received
Display the last outgoing calls.
Display the last incoming calls.
Missed
Display the last missed calls.
Keypad
Enter a phone number to dial.
(Existing entry list)
Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Contacts
Display the phonebook of the paired phone.
432
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Bluetooth® setup
You can turn Bluetooth® function on and off.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Bluetooth.
5. Select Options.
6. Select Bluetooth, then ON.
■
Phone Setup
Continued
433
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Connect Phone.
4. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then select + Connect
New Device.
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
5. Select your phone when it appears on the
list.
u If your phone still does not appear,
search for Bluetooth® devices using your
phone.
From your phone, search for HandsFree
Link.
6. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
7. Select desired functions and then select
Save.
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
the system before you can make and receive hands-
free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•
You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•
Up to six phones can be paired.
•
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or more icons on
the right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
: The phone can be used with HFL.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay
pairing of additional Bluetooth compatible devices is
unavailable.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
434
Features
■ To change the currently paired phone
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 430
2. Select Change Devices.
3. Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
4. Select or .
5. Select Save.
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 430
2. Select Change Devices.
3. Select a phone you want to delete.
4. Select Delete.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
1To change the currently paired phone
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is connected again.
To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device
from the Bluetooth screen.
Continued
435
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 430
2. Select Ringtone.
3. Select Vehicle or Phone.
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 430
2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer.
3. Select ON or OFF.
■
Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Vehicle: The fixed ring tone sounds from the
speakers.
Phone: Depending on the make and model of the
mobile phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will
sound if the phone is connected.
■
Automatic Transferring
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
436
Features
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to the system.
■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 430
2. Select Auto Sync Phone.
3. Select ON or OFF.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
On some phones, it is necessary to set up it enabled
to be imported the cellular phonebook.
When you select a name from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons
indicate what types of numbers are stored for that
name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to the system.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Home
Mobile Work
Other
Pager
Car
Pref
Fax
Voice
437
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 431
2. Select the Recent Calls, Contacts, or
Keypad screen.
3. Select the star icon.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the Favorite Contact is successfully
stored.
u To remove the Favorite Contact, select
the star icon again.
■
Favorite Contacts
Recent Calls Screen
Contacts Screen
Keypad Screen
Star Icon
Star Icon
Star Icon
438
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To edit a Favorite Contact
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 431
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
3. Select Edit on the speed dial entry you
want to edit.
4. Select a setting you want.
5. Select Save.
■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 431
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
3. Select Edit on the speed dial entry you
want to delete.
4. Select Remove.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
Continued
439
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, or Favorite Contact
entries.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
While there is an active connection with Apple
CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with
HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple
CarPlay.
440
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 431
2. Select Contacts.
3. Select a name.
u You can sort by First Name or Last
Name. Select the icon on the upper right
of the screen.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 431
2. Select Keypad.
3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers.
4. Select Call.
u Dialing starts automatically.
Continued
441
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed,
and Received.
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 431
2. Select Recent Calls.
u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or
Received. Select the icon on the upper
right of the screen.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a Favorite Contact
entry
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 431
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
u You can change the order of Favorite
Contact entries by selecting Reorder.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is
connected to the system.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
442
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call... screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the
call.
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Use Handheld: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.
Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower
half of the screen.
Select the option.
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the and buttons.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen.
Mute Icon
Continued
443
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ To turn on or off the text message
notice
1. Press the button.
2. Select Messages.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Pop-up Notification.
5. Select ON or OFF.
■
To Set Up Text Message Options
1To Set Up Text Message Options
To use the text message function, it may be necessary
to set up on your phone.
1To turn on or off the text message notice
ON: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
OFF: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
444
Features
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as the last 20 messages
received on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and
replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. Select the system status icon.
u The status area appears.
2. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message.
3. Select Open to display the message.
u The text message is displayed.
4. Select Play to listen to the message. To
discontinue the message read-out, select
Stop.
■
Receiving a Text Message
1Receiving a Text Message
Some mobile phones might not be able to read the
transmission log of data sent and data received.
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
The system can only receive messages that are sent a
text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the
data services will not be displayed in the list.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 of the last text messages received.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message feature. Only use the text message feature
when conditions allow you to do so safely.
Continued
445
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
You can select one from the Bluetooth® device list to be active and receive
notifications.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Messages.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Change Connected Phone.
5. Change a desired phone.
2 To change the currently paired phone
P. 434
■
Selecting a Phone
1Selecting a Phone
You can only receive notifications from one phone at
a time.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
446
Features
1. Press the button.
2. Select Messages.
u Select a phone if necessary.
3. Select a message.
u The text message is displayed.
■
Displaying Messages
1Displaying Messages
The (blue) icon appears next to an unread
message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message
will also be deleted from the system. If you send a
message from the system, the message goes to your
phone’s outbox.
To see the previous or next message, select Prev
or Next on the message screen.
Message List
Text Message
Continued
447
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ Read or Stop reading a message
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Play.
u The system starts reading the message
aloud.
3. Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Play again to start reading the
message.
■ Reply to a message
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Reply.
3. Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Message sent appears on the screen
when the reply message was successfully
sent.
1Reply to a message
The available reply messages are as follows:
•
Talk to you later, I’m driving.
•
I’m on my way.
•
I’m running late.
•
OK
•
Yes
•
No
The default reply messages are displayed only in
English. If you want to use reply messages in
languages other than English, please edit them.
2 To edit a reply message P. 448
You can add a reply message by selecting + Create
New Message.
2 To edit a reply message P. 448
Only certain phones receive and send messages when
paired and connected. For a list of compatible
phones:
•
U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-888-528-7876.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
448
Features
■ To edit a reply message
1. Press the button.
2. Select Messages.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Edit Replies.
5. Select the reply message you want to edit
or + Create New Message.
u The on-screen keyboard screen is
displayed.
6. Enter a reply message, and then select
Save.
■ To delete a reply message
1. Press the button.
2. Select Messages.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Delete Replies.
5. Select on the reply message you want to
delete.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Select Yes.
1To edit a reply message
You can change the order of reply messages by
selecting Reorder.
449
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Call.
450
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHondaLink® Assist
*
Features
HondaLink® Assist
*
■ Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the HondaLink® operator. If
connected, information about your vehicle, its
location, and its condition can be sent to the
operator
*1
; you also can speak to the operator
when connected.
IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink® Assist, owner activation
constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed
to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/
TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink® Assist will attempt to notify emergency
services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT
SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink® Assist services at any time or for
any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in,
or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental
regulation.
*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not
be sent to the operator.
■
In Case of Emergency
1HondaLink® Assist
*
HondaLink® Assist also provides services you can
operate from the Internet or your smartphone.
To subscribe to HondaLink® Assist, or to get more
information about all of its features, contact an
Honda dealer, or visit hondalink.honda.com
1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
operator if the battery level is low, the line is
disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
coverage.
You cannot use this emergency services when:
•
You travel outside the HondaLink® service coverage
areas.
•
There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
itself.
•
HondaLink Assist is not enabled.
2 To enable notification P. 451
You cannot operate other phone-related functions
using the screen while talking to the operator.
Only the operator can terminate the connection to
your vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
* Not available on all models
452
Features
Refuel Recommend
Your vehicle is equipped with a feature that recommends refueling at a timing of
your preference. Once the system is programmed, this feature will notify you when
refueling is recommended as well as enable you to search for gas stations that are
located in the vicinity of your vehicle.
1. When it is time to refuel the vehicle, a
notification is displayed and a notification
icon is displayed in the header.
2. Touch the box that contains the icon.
3. Select Find Gas Station Now.
4. Choose a gas station from the search
screen of the navigation system.
u For instructions on how to use the
navigation system, refer to the
navigation system manual.
1Refuel Recommend
You can change the setting for Refuel Recommend
by selecting: SettingsSystemRefuel
recommend
When you turn off this feature, the timing that you
programmed for refueling will be deleted.
This feature can only be used when the gas tank fuel
level is below 30 percent.
If you select Find Gas Station Now or put more
than 5 liters of gasoline into the gas tank, the
notification for refueling will disappear. If you prefer
not to be notified, select OFF in the settings for Refuel
Recommend.
When you drive on a rough road or ascend or
descend a hill for an extended period of time, the
notification may disappear or may not be displayed at
all.
Models with navigation system
Notification
icon
453
Driving
This chapter discusses driving and refueling.
Before Driving................................... 454
Towing a Trailer................................ 459
When Driving
Starting the Engine .......................... 465
Precautions While Driving................. 473
Automatic Transmission
*
/Continuously
Variable Transmission
*
................... 474
Shifting.................... 475, 482, 484, 488
SPORT Mode
*
.................................. 491
ECON Button ................................... 492
Adaptive Damper System
*
............... 493
Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
System..........................................494
Agile Handling Assist ............................. 496
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).....497
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ......... 500
Blind spot information System
*
...........502
LaneWatch
TM
*
.................................. 505
Honda Sensing® ................................ 507
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) ....................................... 510
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF)
*
....................... 519
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
....... 535
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).... 550
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)
System........................................558
Traffic Sign Recognition System ....... 562
Front Sensor Camera ....................... 568
Radar Sensor ................................... 570
Braking
Brake System ................................... 571
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 581
Brake Assist System ......................... 582
Parking Your Vehicle........................ 583
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 594
Refueling........................................... 597
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions.... 600
Turbo Engine Vehicle ....................... 601
* Not available on all models
454
Driving
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 642
• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.
■
Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.
Continued
455
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 457
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 176
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 210
2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer
*
Head Restraint Positions P. 216
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 208
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 207
■
Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer
*
, have the
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
* Not available on all models
456
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 41
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 78
457
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Continued
Driving
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the
Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer
*
.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load
*
.
2 Specifications P. 700, 702
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 700, 702
3
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
Label Example
* Not available on all models
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
458
Driving
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
1Maximum Load Limit
Towing a Trailer:
See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your
vehicle is designed to tow a tailer.
2 Towing a Trailer P. 459
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Example2
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
459
Continued
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.
Towing Preparation
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
■ Total trailer weight
Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,
cargo, and everything in or on it must not
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in
excess of this can seriously affect vehicle
handling and performance and can damage
the engine and drivetrain.
■
Towing Load Limits
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
1Towing Load Limits
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the
tongue load.
Break-in Period.
Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle’s first
600 miles (1,000 km).
Never exceed the gross weight ratings.
Gross weight information
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 702
3
WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly
loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a
crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and
trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Total Load
460
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Driving
■ Tongue load
The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded
trailer on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight.
• Excessive tongue load reduces front tire
traction and steering control. Too little
tongue load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
• To achieve a proper tongue load, start by
loading 60% of the load toward the front
of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.
Readjust the load as needed.
Tongue Load
Tongue Load
461
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Driving
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,
and where you are towing.
■ Hitches
The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.
■ Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
■ Trailer brakes
There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,
be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to
your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard.
■ Additional towing equipment
Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a
trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special
mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.
■ Trailer light
Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and
local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
■
Towing Equipment and Accessories
1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and
maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer maker for proper installation and
setup of the equipment.
Improper installation and setup can affect the
handling, stability, and braking performance of your
vehicle.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other
items are recommended or required for your towing
situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type
and brand. If a connector is required, it should only
be installed by a qualified technician.
462
uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer
Driving
Driving Safely with a Trailer
• Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
• Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 459
• Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
• Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving.
• Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
• Check the pressure of the trailer tires, including the spare.
• Drive slower than normal.
• Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
• Use the
(D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
• Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
• Allow more time and distance for braking.
• Do not brake or turn suddenly.
• Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the
climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool
down the engine if necessary.
■
Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
■
Towing Speeds and Gears
■
Turning and Braking
■
Driving in Hilly Terrain
2.0 L engine models
1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Operating speed when towing a trailer must not
exceed 62 mph (100 km/h).
Parking
In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel
chocks at each of the trailer’s tires.
Automatic transmission models
463
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
Continued
Driving
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 693
Your vehicle can be towed behind a motorhome.
Perform the following procedure before towing your vehicle.
1. Put the transmission into neutral.
2. Release the parking brake.
3. Set the power mode to ACCESSORY.
u Make sure the steering wheel does not lock.
4. Turn off all the electric devices. Do not use any accessory power sockets.
u This can prevent the battery from running down.
■ Extended towing
If you tow more than eight hours in one day, you should repeat the “When Your
Vehicle is Towed Behind a Motorhome” at least every eight hours.
You also need to perform the following procedure to prevent the battery from
running down.
■
When Your Vehicle is Towed Behind a Motorhome
1Towing Your Vehicle
Do not exceed 65 mph (100 km/h).
Consult your towing parts sales or rental agency if
any other items are recommended or required for
your towing situation.
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
Manual transmission models
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
464
Driving
1. Remove the 20 A FR ACC SOCKET and 10 A
ACC fuses. These fuses are located in the
interior fuse box.
2 Interior Fuse Box P. 690
2. Remove the 10 A BACK UP fuse. This fuse is
located in the engine compartment fuse
box.
2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box P. 688
3. Store the fuses in a safe place so you do not
lose them.
u Make sure to reinstall the fuses before
you start driving your vehicle.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the clutch pedal.
u The ENGINE START/STOP button
blinks.
5. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the
remote while the ENGINE START/STOP
button is blinking.
u The ENGINE START/STOP button stop
blinking, then stays on.
6. Put the transmission into neutral.
7. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once without depressing the clutch pedal.
u Make sure the steering wheel does not
lock.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Interior Fuse Box
10 A BACK UP
fuse
10 A ACC fuse
20 A FR ACC
SOCKET fuse
1Towing Your Vehicle
Make sure to reinstall the fuses before you start
driving your vehicle.
465
Continued
Driving
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The parking brake indicator (red) comes
on for 30 seconds when you pull up the
electric parking brake switch.
u The parking brake must be applied to
start the engine.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in
(N with the parking brake applied, it is
safer to start it in (P.
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 183
Automatic transmission models
Electric Parking Brake Switch
Brake Pedal
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
466
Driving
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The parking brake indicator (red) comes
on for 30 seconds when you pull up the
electric parking brake switch.
u The parking brake must be applied to
start the engine.
2. Check that the transmission is in
(P, then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in
(N with the parking brake applied, it is
safer to start it in (P.
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
Continuously variable transmission models
Electric Parking Brake Switch
1Starting the Engine
Bring the remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP
button if the battery in the remote is weak.
2 If the Remote Battery is Weak P. 672
The engine may not start if the remote is subjected to
strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds
before trying again.
Brake Pedal
Continued
467
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The parking brake indicator (red) comes
on for 30 seconds when you pull up the
electric parking brake switch.
u The parking brake must be applied to
start the engine.
2. Check that the transmission is in neutral.
Then depress the brake pedal with your
right foot, and the clutch pedal with your
left foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1Starting the Engine
If the vehicle stalls on a slope, the electric parking
brake system may automatically engage. If it does
not, engage it manually, then start the engine again.
Manual transmission models
Manual transmission models
Electric Parking Brake Switch
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal
468
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1. Put the transmission into (P.
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the transmission is in neutral, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the transmission is in any gear other than neutral, depress the clutch pedal, then
press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
■
Stopping the Engine
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
Continued
469
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
You can remotely start the engine using the button on the remote.
■ To start the engine
When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling
and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed
simultaneously.
To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the
button, then press and hold the button.
u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was
transmitted successfully.
■
Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback
*
1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback
*
The remote engine start may violate local laws.
Before using the remote engine start, check your
local laws.
If there are buildings and obstacles between your
vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced.
The range may be less when the vehicle is running.
This distance may vary by external electrical
interference.
The engine may not start by the remote engine start
if:
•
You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the audio/information screen.
•
The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF.
•
The transmission is in a position other than (P.
•
The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked.
3
WARNING
Engine exhaust contains toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing carbon monoxide can kill you or
cause unconsciousness.
Never use the remote engine starter when
the vehicle is parked in a garage or other
area with limited ventilation.
Press the button, then press and hold
the button.
Some exterior lights flash once.
Go within the range,
and try again.
LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.
Some exterior lights flash six
times if the engine runs
successfully.
Some exterior lights will not
flash if the engine runs
unsuccessfully.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
470
Driving
■ To stop the engine
1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback
*
•
You have already used the remote twice to start
the engine.
•
Another registered remote is in the vehicle.
•
There is an antenna failure.
•
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
•
The engine oil pressure is low.
•
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
•
The security system alarm is not set.
The engine may stop while it is running if:
•
You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of
starting the engine with the remote.
•
The engine is stopped by using the remote.
•
The security system alarm is activated.
•
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
•
The hood is open.
•
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
•
The battery is low.
•
The engine oil pressure is low.
•
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on if
there is a problem with the emissions control
systems.
•
You press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the brake pedal.
•
The transmission is in a position other than (P.
•
You press the shift lever release button.
Automatic transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Press and hold the
button for one second.
Go within the range,
and try again.
The exterior lights flash once if the engine stops successfully.
The exterior lights will not flash when the remote is out of
the smart entry system range.
The engine will not stop.
* Not available on all models
Continued
471
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback
*
While the engine is running, the vehicle will
automatically precondition inside the vehicle.
When it is warm outside:
•
The climate control system is activated in auto
mode.
When it is cold outside:
•
The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
•
The rear defogger and door mirror heaters are
activated.
•
The seat heaters
*
and heated steering wheel
*
are
activated.
2 Heated Steering Wheel
*
P. 235
2 Front Seat Heaters
*
P. 236
2 Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation
*
P. 237
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
472
Driving
1. While depressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the transmission into
(D. Select
(R when reversing.
3. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake indicator (red) goes off.
■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Put the transmission into
(D, (S
*
or (L
*
when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and put the transmission into
(1 when facing uphill, or (R
when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
■
Starting to Drive
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
1Starting to Drive
The engine stops when the transmission is taken out
of
(P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed. Follow the step 1 when starting to drive.
You can also release the parking brake by pressing
the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
brake pedal.
When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle
more smoothly by manually releasing it with the
electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with
the accelerator pedal.
When the engine was started using the button on the
remote
When the engine was started using the button on the remote
When the engine was started in any case
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is
switched off.
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
473
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Driving
Precautions While Driving
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
■
In Rain
■
Other Precautions
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not change the transmission while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while
driving, the engine will shut down and all steering
and brake power assist functions will stop, making it
difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the transmission into
(N, as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as not to damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
474
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission
*
/Continuously Variable Transmission
*
Driving
Automatic Transmission
*
/Continuously Variable
Transmission
*
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
■
Creeping
■
Kickdown
* Not available on all models
475
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
Shifting
Change the gear position in accordance with your driving needs.
■ Shift button positions
■ (P (park) button
Park your vehicle in a safe place with the
power mode in ON, then apply the brakes and
press the
(P button to put the transmission in
Park.
The indicators on the sides of the (P button
come on.
Automatic transmission models
1Shifting
To prevent malfunction and unintended
engagement:
•
Do not spill any liquids on or around shift buttons.
•
Do not place or drop any objects on or around shift
buttons.
•
Do not let passengers or children operate the shift
buttons.
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the
driver information interface when you depress the
accelerator pedal with the transmission in
(N.
Put the transmission into
(D or (R with the brake
pedal depressed.
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures
(−22°F/−30°C), there may be a short delay before the
shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you
are in the correct gear before driving.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended
without confirming that Park is engaged.
A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash
resulting in serious injury or death.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal
until you have confirmed that
(P
is shown
on the gear position indicator.
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Transmission is locked
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Transmission is not locked
Drive
Used for:
●
Normal driving (gears change between 1st and
10th automatically)
●
Temporarily driving in the sequential mode
●
Driving in the sequential mode (when driving in
SPORT mode)
(P Button
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
476
Driving
■
Shift Operation
1Shift Operation
NOTICE
When you change (D to ( R and visa versa, depress
the brake pedal to come to a complete stop, then
select the intended gear position while maintaining
brake pressure.
Use the gear position indicator and the shift button
indicator to check the gear position before selecting
a shift button.
If the indicator of the currently selected gear position,
or all the gear position indicators are blinking
simultaneously, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
When the engine speed is increased while the
transmission is in
(N, (P or (R, the fuel supply may
be cut off even without the engine speed entering
the tachometer’s red zone.
The beeper sounds once when you change to
(R.
2 Customized Features P. 381
Press the (P button.
Pull back the
(R button.
Press the
(N button.
Press the
(D button.
Shift Button Indicator
M (sequential mode) Indicator
Tachometer’s red zone
Gear Selection Indicator
Gear Position Indicator
Continued
477
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■ When opening the driver’s door
If you open the driver’s door under the following conditions, the transmission
automatically puts into
(P;
• The vehicle is stationary with the engine running, or moving at 1 mph (2 km/h) or
slower.
• The transmission is in other than
(P.
• You have unfastened the driver side seat belt.
u If you manually put the transmission from (P with the brake pedal depressed,
the transmission will automatically return to
(P once you release the brake
pedal.
■ When turning off the power mode
If you turn the engine off while the vehicle is stationary, and the transmission is in
other than
(P, the transmission automatically puts into (P.
1When opening the driver’s door
You should always put the transmission into
(P
before opening the driver’s door.
Make sure to park the vehicle in a safe place.
2 When Stopped P. 583
If you want to drive the vehicle after the transmission
has automatically put into
(P under the described
conditions, close the door, fasten the seat belt,
depress the brake pedal, then change the gear
position.
If you leave the vehicle, turn off the engine and lock
the doors.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
478
Driving
■ If you want to keep the transmission in
(N position [car wash mode]
With the engine running:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press and release the
(N button.
u (N (Neutral) hold mode will appear on the driver information interface.
3. Press the
(N button again and hold it for two seconds.
u The vehicle will enter car wash mode, which must be used when your vehicle
is pulled through a conveyor type automatic car wash where you or an
attendant do not remain in the vehicle.
If the ENGINE STOP/START button is pressed
after car wash mode has been activated, the
power mode will change to ACCESSORY and
a message will be displayed on the driver
information interface.
u For 15 minutes the transmission remains
in
(N with the power mode will remain
in ACCESSORY. After that, the
transmission automatically changes to
(P and the power mode changes to OFF.
u Manually changing to (P cancels
ACCESSORY mode. The
(P indicator
comes on and the power mode changes
to OFF. You must always put the
transmission into
(P when car wash
mode is no longer needed.
1If you want to keep the transmission in
(N position [car wash
mode]
NOTICE
When transmission is too hot, carwash mode may
not be available. Let the engine idle and cool down
transmission.
To keep the vehicle in
(N position, you can also
follow this procedure:
While the power mode is on, select
(N, and then
within five seconds, press the ENGINE STOP/START
button.
Note that the transmission may not stay in
(N
position while any of the following indicators is on:
•
Transmission system indicator.
•
Malfunction indicator lamp.
•
Charging system indicator.
479
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
■ Restriction on selecting a gear position
You cannot select a transmission under certain circumstances that may lead to a crash.
When the transmission
is in:
1. Under the
circumstances of that:
2. You cannot select:
3. The transmission
remains in/changes to:
How to change
the transmission
(P
The brake pedal is not
depressed.
Other transmission
(P
Release the
accelerator pedal
and depress the
brake pedal.
The accelerator pedal is
depressed.
(N
The vehicle is moving at
low speed without the
brake pedal depressed.
(N
The vehicle is moving at
low speed with the
accelerator pedal
depressed.
(N or (D
The vehicle is moving
forward.
(R
Stop your vehicle in
a safe place, depress
the brake pedal, and
select the
appropriate
transmission.
(R or (N
The vehicle is moving
backward.
(D
(R, (N or (D The vehicle is moving. (P
480
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 10th gears without removing
your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential
mode.
■ When the transmission is in (D:
The vehicle will go into the sequential mode momentarily, and the gear selection
indicator will come on.
When the vehicle goes into the sequential mode by
(- paddle shifter and the lower
gear is available, the transmission properly selects single or double gear change.
Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential mode will automatically
switch off, and the gear selection indicator will go off.
Hold the
(+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.
■ When the transmission is in (D with SPORT mode:
The vehicle will go into the sequential mode, and the M (sequential mode) indicator
and gear selection indicator will come on.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up to the next gear.
You can cancel this mode by holding the
(+ paddle shifter for two seconds. When
the sequential mode is canceled, the sequential mode indicator and gear selection
indicator go off.
■
Sequential Mode
481
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■
Sequential Mode Operation
1Sequential Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear
change.
To change gears continuously, release the paddle
shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.
If the gear selection indicator blinks when you try to
shift up or down, this means your vehicle speed is not
in its allowable gear range or the protection of
transmission system is necessary.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.
Gear Selection
Indicator
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)
(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)
Downshifting when pulling
the
(- paddle shifter.
(Changes to a lower gear)
Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter.
(Changes to a higher gear)
482
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■ Shift lever positions
Continuously variable transmission models without paddle shifters
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF unless the shift lever is in
(P.
The vehicle may move very slightly even in
(N while
the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
Reverse
Used when reversing
Drive
Used for normal driving
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Release Button
Drive (S)
Used:
●
For better acceleration
●
To increase engine braking
●
When going up or down hills
Low
Used:
●
To further increase engine braking
●
When going up or down hills
483
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■
Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the gear position indicator to check the lever
position before pulling away.
If the transmission system indicator blinks when
driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with
the transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release
button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release button and shift.
Gear Position Indicator
(Transmission System Indicator)
Tachometer’s red zone
484
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■ Shift lever positions
Continuously variable transmission models with paddle shifters
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF unless the shift lever is in
(P.
The vehicle may move very slightly even in
(N while
the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
Reverse
Used when reversing
Drive
Used:
●
For normal driving
●
When temporarily driving in the 7-speed
manual shift mode
●
When driving in the 7-speed manual
shift mode (when driving in SPORT
mode)
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Release Button
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Continued
485
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■
Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the gear position indicator to check the lever
position before pulling away.
If the transmission system indicator blinks when
driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with
the transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release
button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release button and shift.
Gear Position Indicator
(Transmission System Indicator)
Tachometer’s red zone
M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)
Indicator
Gear Selection Indicator
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
486
Driving
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without releasing
your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed
manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful
when engine braking is needed.
■ When the shift lever is in (D:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the
number is displayed in the gear selection indicator.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant
speed or accelerate, and the number in the gear selection indicator goes off.
You can cancel this mode by pulling the
(+ paddle shifter for a few seconds.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed
temporarily before making a turn.
■ When the shift lever is in (D with SPORT mode:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the
speed number are displayed in the gear selection indicator. As the vehicle speed
slows down, the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the
vehicle comes to a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.
You can only pull away in 1st speed.
When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, pressing the SPORT button. When
the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and gear selection
indicator go off.
■
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode
In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission
shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter
under the following conditions:
Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed position.
Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the
tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up
automatically.
When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold
of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts
down automatically.
Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces
may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7-
speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back
to the normal D driving mode.
487
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed
change.
To change continuously, release the paddle shifter
before pulling it again for the next speed.
The gear selection indicator blinks when you cannot
shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed
is not in its allowable shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)
(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)
Downshifting when pulling
the
(- paddle shifter.
(Changes to lower speed
number)
Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter.
(Changes to higher speed
number)
488
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then
slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into
(R, or
shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not
“grind.”
When you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your
clutch to wear out faster.
■
Shift Lever Operation
Manual transmission models
1Shifting
NOTICE
Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
Shifting to
(R before stopping can damage the
transmission.
NOTICE
Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone. Should this occur,
it can severely damage your engine.
There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave
the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot
day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because
of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the
outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel
cold.
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you
are in, the engine speed will enter into the
tachometer’s red zone. When this happens, you may
experience a slight jolt.
Continued
489
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Come on to inform you that upshifting or
downshifting is necessary to prevent the
engine from over revving or stalling.
The shift up indicator:
Comes on when upshifting is recommended.
The shift down indicator:
Comes on when downshifting is
recommended.
■
Shift Up/Down Indicators
1Shift Up/Down Indicators
This indicator will not prompt you to downshift to
increase engine braking. It is up to you to downshift
to increase engine braking when driving downhill.
Always shift down at the appropriate vehicle speed.
The shift down indicator does not come on when
downshifting from
(2 to (1.
Road and traffic conditions may require you to shift
at times other than those indicated.
490
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally
shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain
speed.
If you cannot shift to
(R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:
1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R.
2. If you still cannot shift into
(R, apply the
parking brake, and set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into
(R.
4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you
have to go through this procedure repeatedly.
■
Reverse Lockout
491
uuWhen DrivinguSPORT Mode
*
Driving
SPORT Mode
*
To turn the SPORT mode on and off, press the SPORT button.
The SPORT mode increases engine performance, transmission and handling
*
.
This mode is suitable for driving on hills or through curves on mountain roads.
The SPORT mode is turned off every time you start the engine, even if you turned it
on the last time you drove the vehicle.
The ambient meter color changes to a constant red and the turbo meter appears on
the driver information interface.
SPORT Button
SPORT Mode Indicator
Models with adaptive
damper system
Models without adaptive
damper system
* Not available on all models
492
uuWhen DrivinguECON Button
Driving
ECON Button
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.
The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the
performance of the engine, transmission and climate control system.
*1: Models without the adaptive damper system
*2: Models with the adaptive damper system
*3: Continuously variable transmission models without SPORT mode
*4: Manual transmission models
*5: Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models with SPORT mode
1ECON Button
While in ECON mode, the climate control system has
greater temperature fluctuations.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
493
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Damper System
*
Driving
Adaptive Damper System
*
Constantly controls your vehicle’s front and rear dampers according to current road
conditions, vehicle speed and steering operation.
You can change handling response by turning the SPORT mode on.
2 SPORT Mode
*
P. 491
* Not available on all models
494
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
■
VSA® Operation
1Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
The Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist® (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
(ACC) with low speed follow (LSF)
*
, adaptive cruise
control (ACC)
*
, safety support and low tire pressure/
TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a
message in the driver information interface when you
set the power mode to ON after re-connecting a
battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
VSA® System
Indicator
* Not available on all models
495
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To partially disable VSA® functionality/features,
press and hold it until you hear a beep.
Your vehicle will have normal braking and
cornering ability, but traction control function
will be less effective.
To restore VSA® functionality/features, press
the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a
beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■
VSA® On and Off
1Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the button is pressed, the traction control
function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if
you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
VSA® OFF Indicator
496
uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist
Driving
Agile Handling Assist
Lightly brakes the front wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and
helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering.
1Agile Handling Assist
The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in
all driving situations. You still need to drive and
corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and
always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, the agile handling assist does not
activate.
You may hear a sound coming from the engine
compartment while the agile handling assist is
activated. This is normal.
497
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Continued
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to
come on and a message to appear on the driver information interface.
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 642
Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.
• The transmission is in neutral.
• The transmission is in
(P.
• The power mode is in ON.
■
TPMS Calibration
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
•
Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
•
Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come
on as a result of over inflation.
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 642
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
•
You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
•
You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
•
Snow chains
*
are used.
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
All models
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
498
Driving
You can calibrate the system from the
customized feature on the audio/information
screen.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 252
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
3. Rotate to select Settings, then press
.
4. Rotate to select Vehicle Settings, then
press .
5. Rotate to select TPMS Calibration,
then press .
6. Rotate to select Calibrate, then press
.
• If the Calibration failed to start. message
appears, repeat steps 5-6.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
•
A compact spare tire is used.
•
There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,
such as when towing a trailer
*
, than the condition
at calibration.
•
Snow chains
*
are used.
The Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist® (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
(ACC) with low speed follow (LSF)
*
, adaptive cruise
control (ACC)
*
, safety support and low tire pressure/
TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a
message in the driver information interface when you
set the power mode to ON after re-connecting a
battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
1TPMS Calibration
TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is
installed.
The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30-
60 mph (48-97 km/h).
During this period, if the power mode is set to ON and
the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may
notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on
briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration
process is not yet complete.
Models with color audio
* Not available on all models
499
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
You can calibrate the system from the
customized feature on the audio/information
screen.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 273
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the button.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Vehicle.
5. Select TPMS Calibration.
6. Select Calibrate.
• If the Calibration Failed To Start.
message appears, repeat steps 5-6.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.
1TPMS Calibration
If the snow chains
*
are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.
Models with Display Audio
* Not available on all models
500
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
U.S. models
501
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
502
uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System
*
Driving
Blind spot information System
*
Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle,
particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as “blind spots.”
When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the
appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you
change lanes.
■ How the system works
1Blind spot information System
*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the blind spot information
system has limitations. Over reliance on the blind spot
information system may result in a collision.
The blind spot information system alert indicator may
not come on under the following conditions:
•
A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more
than two seconds.
•
A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
•
The speed difference between your vehicle and the
vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10
km/h).
•
An object not detected by the radar sensors
approaches or passes your vehicle.
•
A vehicle running in the adjacent lane is a
motorcycle or other small vehicle.
3
WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on the blind spot
information system when changing lanes.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
Alert zone range
A: Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)
B: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
C: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
Radar Sensors:
underneath the
rear bumper
corners
Alert Zone
A
B
C
●
Your vehicle speed is
between 20 mph (32 km/h)
and 100 mph (160 km/h).
●
The transmission is in (D.
Automatic transmission/
Continuously variable
transmission models
* Not available on all models
Continued
503
uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System
*
Driving
■ When the system detects a vehicle
Blind spot information System Alert Indicator:
Located on the outside rearview mirror on
both sides.
Comes on when:
• A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind
to overtake you with a speed difference of
no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your
vehicle.
• You pass a vehicle with a speed difference
of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Blinks and a beeper sounds when:
You move the turn signal lever in the direction
of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds
three times.
1Blind spot information System
*
The system is for your convenience only. Even if an
object is within the alert zone, the following
situations may occur.
•
The blind spot information system alert indicator
may not come on due to obstruction (splashes,
etc.) even without the Blind Spot Information
System Not Available driver information
interface appearing.
•
The blind spot information system alert indicator
may come on even with the message appearing.
You can change the setting for the blind spot
information system.
2 Customized Features P. 381
The system does not operate when in
(R.
Turn the system off when towing a trailer.
The system may not work properly for the following
reasons:
•
The added mass tilts the vehicle and changes the
radar coverage.
•
The trailer itself can be detected by the radar
sensors, causing the blind spot information system
alert indicators to come on.
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable
transmission models
2.0 L engine models
Comes On
Blinks
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System
*
504
Driving
■ Blind spot information System On and Off
When you turn the blind spot information
system on and off, do the following.
1. Press the safety support switch.
2. Roll the left selector wheel to the
symbol and push it.
The blind spot information system is in the
previously selected ON or OFF setting each
time you start the engine.
1Blind spot information System
*
The blind spot information system may be adversely
affected when:
•
Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc,.) are
detected.
•
An object that does not reflect radio waves well,
such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
•
Driving on a curved road.
•
A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent
lane.
•
The system picks up external electrical interference.
•
The rear bumper or the sensors have been
improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been
deformed.
•
The orientation of the sensors has been changed.
•
In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog).
•
Making a turn at an intersection.
•
Driving on a bumpy road.
•
Making a short turn that slightly tilts the vehicle.
For proper the blind spot information system
operation:
•
Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.
•
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with
labels or stickers of any kind.
•
Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear
bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be
repaired, or the rear bumper corner area is strongly
impacted.
Left Selector Wheel
Safety Support Switch
* Not available on all models
505
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatch
TM
*
Continued
Driving
LaneWatch
TM
*
LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear
areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to
the passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these
areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use
of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience
while driving.
Canadian models
1LaneWatch
TM
*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.
The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.
The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display
of traffic to the side and rear under the following
conditions:
•
Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle.
•
Your tires are over or under inflated.
•
Your tires or wheels are of varied size or construction.
3
WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
1 2
Camera
Audio/Information Screen
Move the turn signal
lever to the passenger
side.
Press the LaneWatch
button.
Pull the turn signal
lever back.
Press the LaneWatch
button again.
The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information screen.
The system activates when you:
The system deactivates when you:
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatch
TM
*
506
Driving
■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.
• Show with turn signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
• Show Reference Line: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the
LaneWatch monitor.
• Display Time after Turn Signal Off: Changes the remaining LaneWatch
display time after you pull the turn signal lever back.
• Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 381
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 248
■ Reference Lines
Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 is farther away.
1LaneWatch
TM
*
The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen slightly look
different from what they are.
For proper LaneWatch operation:
•
The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera
lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,
moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
•
Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
•
Do not touch the camera lens.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the
transmission is in
(R.
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable
transmission models
2
3
1
1Reference Lines
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to
your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm
the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.
The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions
and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines
on the screen may seem to appear closer than the
actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if:
•
The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
•
The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.
* Not available on all models
507
Continued
Driving
Honda Sensing®
Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly
different kinds of sensors: a radar sensor located in the front lower grille and a front
sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview
mirror.
Honda Sensing® has following functions.
■ The functions which do not require switch operations to activate
• Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
2 P. 510
• Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
2 P. 558
• Traffic Sign Recognition System
2 P. 562
■ The functions which require switch operations to activate
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
2 P. 519
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
2 P. 535
• Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
2 P. 550
* Not available on all models
508
uuHonda Sensing® u
Driving
■ MAIN Button
Press to activate standby mode for ACC with
LSF
*
/ACC
*
and LKAS. Or press to cancel these
systems.
■ LKAS Button
Press to activate or cancel the LKAS.
■ RES/+ and SET/- Button
Press RES/+ button to resume the ACC with
LSF
*
/ACC
*
or increase the vehicle speed.
Press SET/− button to set the ACC with LSF
*
/
ACC
*
or decrease the vehicle speed.
■ Interval Button
Press the (interval) button to change the
ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
following interval.
■ CANCEL Button
Press to cancel ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
.
■
Operation Switches for the ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
/LKAS
MAIN button
Interval
Button
CANCEL
Button
LKAS Button
RES/+ Button
SET/- Button
* Not available on all models
509
uuHonda Sensing® u
Driving
You can see the current state of ACC with
LSF
*
/ACC
*
and LKAS.
a
Indicates that ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
, and
LKAS are ready to be activated.
b
Indicates that LKAS is activated and
whether or not traffic lane lines are
detected.
c
Indicates whether or not a vehicle is
detected ahead.
d
Shows the set vehicle speed.
e
Shows the set vehicle interval.
You can have the head-up display show you
the current state of each function.
2 Head-Up Display
*
P. 157
■
Driver Information Interface Content
Models with head-up display
* Not available on all models
510
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBS
TM
is designed to alert you when a
potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help
minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.
■ How the system works
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Important Safety Reminder
The CMBS
TM
is designed to reduce the severity of an
unavoidable collision. It does not prevent a collision
nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your
responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering
wheel appropriately according to the driving
conditions.
The CMBS
TM
may not activate or may not detect a
vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain
conditions:
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 514
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 568
For directions on the proper handling of the radar
sensor, refer to the following page.
2 Radar Sensor P. 570
When the CMBS
TM
activates, it may automatically
apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle
stops or a potential collision is not determined.
The radar sensor is at the
lower part of the front
bumper.
The camera is located
behind the rearview
mirror.
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about
3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.
When to use
The CMBS
TM
activates when:
●
The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected in
front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.
●
Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines
there is a chance of a collision with:
- Vehicles detected in front of you that are stationary, oncoming, or traveling in your
same direction.
- A pedestrian who is detected in front of you.
●
Your vehicle speed is above 62 mph (100 km/h), and the system determines there
is a chance of a collision with a vehicle detected in front of you traveling in your
same direction.
Continued
511
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■ When the system activates
At system’s earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/
Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through audio/
information screen setting options.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
The camera in the CMBS
TM
is also designed to detect
pedestrians.
However, this pedestrian detection feature may not
activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of
your vehicle under certain conditions.
Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection
limitations from the list.
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 514
The head-up warning uses a lens located at the front
end of the dashboard.
Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.
Models with head-up display
Lens
The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the
collision is avoided.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.).
Beep
Head-up
Warning
Lights
*
Visual Alerts
Audible Alert
* Not available on all models
512
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBS
TM
may not go through all of
the stages before initiating the last stage.
■
Collision Alert Stages
Distance between vehicles
CMBS
TM
The radar sensor detects a vehicle Audible & Visual WARNINGS Braking
Stage
one
There is a risk of a collision with the
vehicle ahead of you.
When in Long, visual and audible alerts come
on at a longer distance from a vehicle ahead
than in Normal setting, and in Short, at a
shorter distance than in Normal.
—
Stage
two
The risk of a collision has increased,
time to respond is reduced.
Visual and audible alerts.
Lightly
applied
Stage
three
The CMBS
TM
determines that a
collision is unavoidable.
Forcefully
applied
Your Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Normal
ShortLong
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Continued
513
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
When you turn the CMBS
TM
on and off, do the
following.
1. Press the safety support switch.
2. Roll the left selector wheel to the
symbol and push it.
u The message appears on the driver
information interface when the system
becomes on or off.
The CMBS
TM
is turned on every time you start
the engine, even if you turned it off the last
time you drove the vehicle.
■
CMBS
TM
On and Off
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
The CMBS
TM
may automatically shut off, and the
safety support indicator (amber) will come and stay
on under certain conditions:
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 514
When the CMBS
TM
is activated, it will continue to
operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially
depressed. However, it will be canceled if the
accelerator pedal is deeply depressed.
The Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist® (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
(ACC) with low speed follow (LSF)
*
, adaptive cruise
control (ACC)
*
, safety support and low tire pressure/
TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a
message in the driver information interface when you
set the power mode to ON after re-connecting a
battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Left Selector Wheel
Safety Support Switch
* Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
514
Driving
The system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) will
come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed
below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBS
TM
functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 568
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between objects and the background.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
■
CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
515
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• When tire chains
*
are installed.
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• Driving with the parking brake applied.
• When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty.
• The vehicle is towing a trailer
*
.
■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
* Not available on all models
516
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
• When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by
side.
• Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s
shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
• When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about
6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
• When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
• When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running.
• When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
■ Automatic shutoff
The CMBS
TM
may automatically shut itself off and the safety support indicator
(amber) comes and stays on when:
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
Once the conditions that caused the CMBS
TM
to shut off improve or are addressed
(e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.
Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only
517
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
The CMBS
TM
may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or
when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:
■ When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.
■ At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.
■
With Little Chance of a Collision
518
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■ On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.
■ Through a low bridge at high speed
You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.
■ Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train
tracks or roadside objects (such as a traffic sign and guard rail) on a curve or, when
parking, stationary vehicles and walls.
519
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Continued
Driving
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate
and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
When ACC with LSF slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle’s brake
lights will illuminate.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC with LSF.
Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always
keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other
vehicles.
3
WARNING
Improper use of ACC with LSF can lead
to a crash.
Use ACC with LSF only when driving on
expressways or freeways and in good
weather conditions.
3
WARNING
ACC with LSF has limited braking
capability and may not stop your vehicle
in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle
that quickly stops in front of you.
Always be prepared to apply the brake
pedal if the conditions require.
When to use
■
Vehicle speed for ACC with LSF: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with
LSF range – ACC with LSF operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
No vehicle is detected within ACC with LSF range – ACC with LSF operates at
the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or above.
■
Gear position for ACC with LSF: In (D or (S
*
.
The radar sensor is at the
lower part of the front
bumper.
The camera is
located behind
the rearview
mirror.
* Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
520
Driving
■ How to activate the system
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
When the MAIN button is pressed, both ACC with
LSF and the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are
either turned on or off.
ACC with LSF may not work properly under certain
conditions.
2 ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
P. 525
When not using ACC with LSF: Turn off adaptive
cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will
turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
Do not use ACC with LSF under the following
conditions:
•
On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
•
On roads with sharp turns.
•
On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such
cases, ACC with LSF will not apply the brakes to
maintain the set speed.
•
On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.
How to use
■
Press the MAIN button on
the steering wheel.
ACC (green) is on in the instrument panel.
ACC with LSF is ready to use.
* Not available on all models
Continued
521
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Driving
When driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the
pedal and press the SET/– button when you reach the desired speed. The moment
you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with LSF begins.
When driving slower than about 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving
and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the button fixes the set speed to
about 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If the vehicle is
stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.
When ACC with LSF starts operating, the
vehicle icon, interval bars and set speed
appear on the driver information interface.
When you use ACC with LSF, Straight Driving
Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering
system) is activated.
By enabling the steering system to
automatically compensate for natural steering
pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for
you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface or
audio/information screen between mph and km/h.
2 Speed Unit P. 149
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
The Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist® (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
(ACC) with low speed follow (LSF), safety support
and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on
in amber along with a message in the driver
information interface when you set the power mode
to ON after re-connecting a battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
On when ACC with LSF
begins
Press and release
SET/− button
Set Vehicle Speed
Set Vehicle Interval
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
522
Driving
■ There is a vehicle ahead
ACC with LSF monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with LSF range. If a
vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with LSF system maintains or decelerates your
vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following interval from the
vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following Interval P. 529
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed is detected in front of you, your
vehicle starts to slow down.
■
When in Operation
1When in Operation
If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if
another vehicle cuts in front of you, the beeper
sounds, a message appears on the driver information
interface, and the head-up warning lights
*
flash.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
interval from the vehicle ahead.
Beep
ACC with LSF Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
A vehicle icon appears on the
driver information interface.
* Not available on all models
Continued
523
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Driving
■ There is no vehicle ahead
Your vehicle maintains the set speed without
having to keep your foot on the brake or
accelerator pedal.
If there previously was a vehicle detected
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC with LSF accelerates your
vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.
■ When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or
visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with LSF range.
ACC with LSF stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal,
the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following interval while a
vehicle ahead is within the ACC with LSF range.
1When in Operation
Even if the interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with LSF may
start accelerating your vehicle under the following
circumstances:
•
The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
•
A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval
between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in
front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with
LSF detecting range. Change the ACC Forward
Vehicle Detect Beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
Limitations
You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
interval when using ACC with LSF. Additionally, ACC
with LSF may not work properly under certain
conditions.
2 ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
P. 525
A vehicle icon with dotted-line
contour appears on the driver
information interface.
1When you depress the accelerator pedal
While the accelerator pedal is depressed, the system
does not apply the brakes to keep the following
interval, as well as the BRAKE message on the driver
information interface display does not appear.
2 When in Operation P. 522
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
524
Driving
■ A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with LSF range and slows to a stop
Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The
Stopped message appears on the driver
information interface.
When the vehicle ahead of you starts again,
the vehicle icon on the driver information
interface blinks. If you press the RES/+ or SET/
– button, or depress the accelerator pedal,
ACC with LSF operates again within the prior
set speed.
If no vehicle is ahead of you before you
resume driving, depress the accelerator pedal
and ACC with LSF will operate again within
the prior set speed.
1A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with LSF range and slows
to a stop
3
WARNING
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped
while the ACC with LSF system is
operating can result in the vehicle
moving without operator control.
A vehicle that moves without operator
control can cause a crash, resulting in
serious injury or death.
Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is
stopped by ACC with LSF.
Continued
525
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Driving
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC with LSF indicator will come on
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the ACC with LSF functions.
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
■ Vehicle conditions
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• The parking brake is applied.
• When the radar sensor cover is dirty.
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains
*
are installed.
■
ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
1ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
For directions on the proper handling of the radar
sensor, refer to the following page.
2 Radar Sensor P. 570
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 568
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for
cleaning the radar sensor cover. Clean it with water
or a mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN
button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the
following situations, the radar sensor may not work
properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
•
The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
•
You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
•
Your vehicle has a frontal collision.
* Not available on all models
526
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Driving
■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high
speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is
significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
527
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Continued
Driving
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
• When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
Radar detects upper section of
an empty carrier truck.
Panel truck, tanker
truck, etc.
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
528
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or SET/– button on the
steering wheel.
• Each time you press the RES/+ or SET/– button, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep pressing the RES/+ or SET/– button, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
than your increased set speed, ACC with LSF may not
accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set
interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
When you depress the accelerator pedal and then
push and release the SET/– button, the current speed
of the vehicle is set.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
529
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Continued
Driving
Press the (Interval) button to change the
ACC with LSF following interval.
Each time you press the button, the following
interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected
ahead of you) setting cycles through extra
long, long, middle, and short following
intervals.
Determine the most appropriate following
interval setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following
interval requirements set by local regulation.
■
To Set or Change Following Interval
Interval
Button
530
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Driving
The higher your vehicle’s following speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or
extra long following interval becomes. See the following examples for your
reference.
When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has
stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with LSF
interval setting.
Following Interval
When the Set Speed is:
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)
Short
83 feet
25 meters
1.1 sec
100 feet
31 meters
1.1 sec
Middle
110 feet
33 meters
1.5 sec
137 feet
42 meters
1.5 sec
Long
154 feet
47 meters
2.1 sec
200 feet
61 meters
2.1 sec
Extra
Long
207 feet
63 meters
2.9 sec
272 feet
83 meters
2.9 sec
Continued
531
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Driving
To cancel ACC with LSF, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
u The ACC with LSF indicator (green) goes
off.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u When the LSF function has stopped the
vehicle, you cannot cancel ACC with LSF
by depressing the brake pedal.
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled ACC with LSF, you can resume the prior set
speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+
button.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
with LSF has been turned off using the MAIN button.
Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then
set the desired speed.
CANCEL
Button
MAIN
Button
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
532
Driving
■ Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when
ACC with LSF is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC
with LSF to automatically cancel:
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty.
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA® or CMBS
TM
is activated.
• When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC with LSF range is too close to your vehicle.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• When the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
• When passing through an enclosed space, such as tunnel.
In the following cases, a buzzer sounds, ACC with LSF is deactivated, and the Cruise
Cancelled: Slope Too Steep. Watch Downhill Speed message appears in the
driver information interface.
• The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to maintain the set speed (for
example, you are descending a long slope).
The ACC with LSF automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following
causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
• The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
• The engine is turned off.
1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC with LSF has been automatically
canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed.
Wait until the condition that caused ACC with LSF to
cancel improves, then press the SET/– button.
Continued
533
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Driving
Press and hold the (interval) button for one
second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on
the driver information interface for two
seconds, and then the mode switches to
Cruise.
To switch back to ACC with LSF, press and
hold the button again for one second.
■ When to use
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.
Take your foot off the pedal and press the SET/– button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the SET/– button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power
Steering system) is activated.
By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering
pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight
line.
■
To Switch ACC with LSF to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC with LSF to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
you to maintain a following interval from a vehicle
ahead of you.
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface or
audio/information screen between mph and km/h.
2 Speed Unit P. 149
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
ACC with
LSF ON
Cruise
Control ON
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
534
Driving
Each time you press the RES/+ or SET/– button, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
If you keep pressing the RES/+ or SET/– button, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
•
When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
•
When the MAIN button is turned off.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control canceled automatically.
535
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Continued
Driving
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the
brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a
safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.
3
WARNING
Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.
Use ACC only when driving on
expressways or freeways in good
weather conditions.
3
WARNING
ACC has limited braking capability.
When your vehicle speed drops below
25 mph (40 km/h), ACC will
automatically cancel and no longer will
apply your vehicle’s brakes.
Always be prepared to apply the brake
pedal when conditions require.
When to use
■
Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.
■
Gear position for ACC: In (2 or higher position.
The radar sensor is at the
lower part of the front
bumper.
The camera is
located behind the
rearview mirror.
* Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
536
Driving
■ How to activate the system
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
When the MAIN button is pressed, ACC and Lane
Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are both turned on or
off.
ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 540
When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by
pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
Do not use ACC under the following conditions:
•
On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
•
On roads with sharp turns.
•
On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such
cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain
the set speed.
•
On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.
When the engine speed slows down, try to
downshift.
When the engine speed goes up, try to upshift.
You can maintain the set speed if you change gear
within five seconds.
How to use
■
Press the MAIN button on
the steering wheel.
ACC (green) is on in the instrument panel.
ACC is ready to use.
* Not available on all models
Continued
537
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press down the SET/– button when you reach the
desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC
begins.
When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon,
interval bars and set speed appear on the
driver information interface.
When you use ACC, Straight Driving Assist (a
feature of the Electric Power Steering system)
is activated.
By enabling the steering system to
automatically compensate for natural steering
pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for
you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface or
audio/information screen between mph and km/h.
2 Speed Unit P. 149
2 Customized Features P. 381
The Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist® (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
(ACC), safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS
indicators may come on in amber along with a
message in the driver information interface when you
set the power mode to ON after re-connecting a
battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
On when ACC begins
Press and release
SET/− Button
Set Vehicle Speed
Set Vehicle Interval
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
538
Driving
■ There is a vehicle ahead
ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected
doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order
to keep the vehicle’s set following interval from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following Interval P. 544
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed is detected in front of you, your
vehicle starts to slow down.
■
When in Operation
1When in Operation
If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down
abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in
front of you, the beeper sounds and a message
appears on the driver information interface.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
interval from the vehicle ahead.
Beep
ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
A vehicle icon appears on the
driver information interface.
Continued
539
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
■ There is no vehicle ahead
Your vehicle maintains the set speed without
having to keep your foot on the brake or
accelerator pedal.
If there previously was a vehicle detected
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to
the set speed, and then maintains it.
■ When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or
visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC range.
ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the
system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following interval while a
vehicle ahead is within the ACC range.
1When in Operation
Even if the interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start
accelerating your vehicle under the following
circumstances:
•
The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
•
A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval
between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in
front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC
detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 381
Limitations
You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
interval when using ACC. Additionally, ACC may not
work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 540
A vehicle icon with dotted-line
contour appears on the driver
information interface.
1When you depress the accelerator pedal
While the accelerator pedal is depressed, the system
does not apply the brakes to keep the following
interval, as well as the BRAKE message on the driver
information interface does not appear.
2 When in Operation P. 538
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
540
Driving
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
■ Vehicle conditions
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• The parking brake is applied.
• When the radar sensor cover is dirty.
• When the front of the vehicle tilts up due to heavy cargo in the trunk or rear seats.
• When tire chains
*
are installed.
■
ACC Conditions and Limitations
1ACC Conditions and Limitations
For directions on the proper handling of the radar
sensor, refer to the following page.
2 Radar Sensor P. 570
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 568
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for
cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a
mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN
button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the
following situations, the radar sensor may not work
properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
•
The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
•
You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
•
Your vehicle has a frontal collision.
* Not available on all models
541
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Continued
Driving
■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high
speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is
significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
542
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
• When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
Radar detects upper section of
an empty carrier truck.
Panel truck, tanker
truck, etc.
Continued
543
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or SET/– button on the
steering wheel.
• Each time you press the RES/+ or SET/– button, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep pressing the RES/+ or SET/– button, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
than your increased set speed, ACC may not
accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set
interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
When you depress the accelerator pedal and then
push and release the SET/– button, the current speed
of the vehicle is set.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
544
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
Press the (interval) button to change the
ACC following interval.
Each time you press the button, the following
interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected
ahead of you) setting cycles through extra
long, long, middle, and short following
intervals.
Determine the most appropriate following
interval setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following
interval requirements set by local regulation.
■
To Set or Change Following Interval
Interval Button
545
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Continued
Driving
The higher your vehicle’s following speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or
extra long following interval becomes. See the following examples for your
reference.
Following Interval
When the Set Speed is:
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)
Short
84 feet
26 meters
1.1 sec
102 feet
31 meters
1.1 sec
Middle
111 feet
34 meters
1.5 sec
139 feet
43 meters
1.5 sec
Long
155 feet
48 meters
2.1 sec
202 feet
62 meters
2.1 sec
Extra
Long
215 feet
66 meters
3.0 sec
282 feet
86 meters
3.0 sec
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
546
Driving
To cancel ACC, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
u The ACC indicator (green) goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or
more.
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed
while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button when
driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press
the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the
desired speed.
CANCEL Button
MAIN Button
Continued
547
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
■ Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when
ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to
automatically cancel:
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty.
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA® or CMBS
TM
is activated.
• When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• When the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
• When passing through an enclosed space, such as tunnel.
• Ignoring shift down indication shown in the tachometer display will cancel the
ACC after about 10 seconds.
• The engine speed goes into the tachometer’s red zone.
• The engine speed goes to below 1,000 rpm.
• You shift into neutral temporarily when shifting into a higher or lower gear.
In the following cases, a buzzer sounds, ACC is deactivated, and the Cruise
Cancelled: Slope Too Steep. Watch Downhill Speed message appears in the
driver information interface.
• The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to maintain the set speed (for
example, you are descending a long slope).
1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC has been automatically canceled,
you can still resume the prior set speed.
Wait until the condition that caused ACC to cancel
improves, then press the SET/– button.
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
548
Driving
Press and hold the (interval) button for one
second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on
the driver information interface for two
seconds, and then the mode switches to
Cruise.
To switch back to ACC, press and hold the
button again for one second.
■ When to use
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.
Take your foot off the pedal and press the SET/– button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the SET/– button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power
Steering system) is activated.
By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering
pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight
line.
■
To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
you to maintain a following interval from a vehicle
ahead of you.
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface or
audio/information screen between mph and km/h.
2 Speed Unit P. 149
2 Customized Features P. 381
ACC ON
Cruise
Control ON
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
549
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
• Each time you press the RES/+ or SET/– button, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• If you keep the RES/+ or SET/– button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or more.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
•
When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
•
When the MAIN button is turned off.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control canceled automatically.
550
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a
substitute for your vehicle control. The system does
not work if you take your hands off the steering
wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages P. 105
Do not place objects on the instrument panel.
Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent
correct detection of the traffic lanes.
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect
all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will
vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker
condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.
The LKAS may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 555
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 568
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and
resumes after the signals are off.
If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts
activate, and torque is applied to the steering.
■
Front Sensor Camera
Monitors the lane
lines.
■
Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering
wheel and a warning display alert
you that the vehicle is drifting out of
a detected lane.
■
Steering input assist
The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and
right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to
either of the lane lines.
Continued
551
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle
nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become
stronger.
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering
wheel vibration as well as a warning display.
■
Lane Keep Support Function
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
The LKAS may not function as designed while driving
in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with
sharp curves.
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will
temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the
system will recover automatically.
■
Lane Departure Warning Function
Warning Area
Warning Area
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
552
Driving
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• The vehicle speed is between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in high speed operation.
■ How to activate the system
1. Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the driver information
interface.
The system is ready to use.
2. Press the LKAS button.
u Lane outlines appear on the driver
information interface.
The system is activated.
■
When the System can be Used
1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line
due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
MAIN Button
LKAS Button
Continued
553
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the
lane while driving.
u The dotted outer lines change to solid
ones once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.
To cancel the LKAS:
Press the MAIN or LKAS button.
The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the
engine, even if you turned it on the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■
To cancel
1To cancel
Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC with LSF
on and off.
Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off.
Models with ACC with LSF
Models with ACC
MAIN Button
LKAS
Button
554
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
■ The system operation is suspended if
you:
• Set the wipers to HI.
u Turning the wipers off or setting it to LO
resumes the LKAS.
• Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph
(64 km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to about
45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the
LKAS.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the
brake pedal.
• Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the
wipers operate at high speed.
u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop
or operate at low speed.
■ The LKAS may automatically be suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.
• The steering wheel is quickly turned.
• You fail to steer the vehicle.
• Driving through a sharp curve.
• Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).
Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
When the LKAS is suspended,
the lane lines on the driver
information interface change to
contour lines, and the beeper
sounds (if activated).
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
555
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
■ The LKAS may automatically be canceled when:
• The camera temperature gets extremely high or low.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• The ABS or VSA® system engages.
The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in
the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
■
LKAS Conditions and Limitations
556
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks
Very wide or narrow traffic lane
557
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• The vehicle is towing a trailer
*
.
Lane void of lines at junction
* Not available on all models
558
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system determines a possibility of your
vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the
roadway altogether.
The front camera behind the rearview mirror
monitors left and right lane markings (in white
or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close
to detected lane markings without a turn
signal activated, the system, in addition to a
visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts
you with rapid vibrations on the steering
wheel, to help you remain within the detected
lane.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
As a visual alert, the Lane Departure
message appears on the driver information
interface.
If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on
the roadway, it may apply braking.
u Braking is applied only when the lane markings are solid continuous lines.
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid
crossing over detected lane markings.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system
beeps to alert you.
■
How the System Works
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has
limitations.
Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a
collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the
vehicle within your driving lane.
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is
detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM
system may not detect all lane markings or lane or
roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on
weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is
always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 568
The RDM system may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 560
There are times when you may not notice RDM
functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or
road surface conditions.
In the following case, a beeper sounds, a message
related to the ACC with LSF
*
/ACC
*
appears on the
driver information interface, and the braking function
controlled by the RDM system is canceled.
•
The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to
maintain the set speed (for example, you are
descending a long slope).
* Not available on all models
Continued
559
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving
The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the
following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in high speed operation.
• The vehicle is not accelerating or braking, and the steering wheel is not being
turned.
• The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.
■
How the System Activates
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
If LKAS is off and you have selected Narrow from the
customized options using the audio/information
screen, the message below will appear in case the
system determines a possibility of your vehicle
crossing over detected lane markings.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
1How the System Activates
The RDM system may automatically shut off and the
safety support indicator (amber) comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 78
RDM system function can be impacted when the
vehicle is:
•
Not driven within a traffic lane.
•
Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
•
Driven in a narrow lane.
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
560
Driving
When you turn the RDM on and off, do the
following.
1. Press the safety support switch.
2. Roll the left selector wheel to the
symbol and push it.
u The message appears on the driver
information interface when the system
becomes on or off.
The RDM is in the previously selected ON or
OFF setting each time you start the engine.
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
■
RDM On and Off
1RDM On and Off
When you have selected Warning Only from the
customized options using the audio/information
screen, the system does not operate the steering
wheel and braking.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
The Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist® (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
(ACC) with low speed follow (LSF)
*
, adaptive cruise
control (ACC)
*
, safety support and low tire pressure/
TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a
message in the driver information interface when you
set the power mode to ON after re-connecting a
battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Safety Support Switch
Left Selector Wheel
■
RDM Conditions and Limitations
* Not available on all models
561
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains
*
are installed.
• The vehicle is towing a trailer
*
.
* Not available on all models
562
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving
Traffic Sign Recognition System
Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit, your vehicle
has just passed through, showing it on the driver information interface and the
head-up display
*
.
When the camera located behind the rearview mirror captures traffic signs while
driving, the system displays the ones that are recognized as designated for your
vehicle. The sign icon will be displayed until the vehicle reaches a predetermined
time and distance.
The sign icon also may switch to another one or disappear when:
• The other designated limit is detected.
• You make a turn with a turn signal at an intersection.
■
How the System Works
1Traffic Sign Recognition System
Not all signs may be displayed, but any signs posted
on roadsides should not be ignored. The system does
not work on the designated traffic signs of all the
countries you travel, nor in all situations.
Do not rely too much on the system. Always drive at
speeds appropriate for the road conditions.
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the camera’s field of
vision and cause the system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Driver information interface
Head-up display
*
* Not available on all models
Continued
563
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving
If the system does not detect any traffic signs while you are driving, the image below
may appear.
1Traffic Sign Recognition System
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system
to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face
the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use
a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the
camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message
appears, the traffic sign recognition system does not
work, and will be displayed.
•
Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the air flow directed towards the camera.
•
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Clean Front Windshield message
appears, the traffic sign recognition system does not
work, and will be displayed.
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driver information interface
Head-up display
*
* Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System
564
Driving
The traffic sign recognition system may not be able to recognize the traffic sign in
the following cases.
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• There are portions remaining to be wiped.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Driving at night, in dark areas such as long tunnels.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• A vehicle in front of you is travelling flying up spray or snow.
■
Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations
1Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations
When the traffic sign recognition system
malfunctions, appears on the driver information
interface. If this message does not disappear, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driver information interface
Head-up display
*
* Not available on all models
565
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Continued
Driving
■ The position or the condition of the traffic sign
• A sign is hard to be found since it is in a complicated area.
• A sign is located far away from your vehicle.
• A sign is located where the beam of the headlight is hard to reach.
• A sign is on a corner or bend in the road.
• Faded or bent signs.
• Rotated or damaged signs.
• A sign is covered with mud, snow, or frost.
• A part of the sign is hidden by the trees, or the sign itself is hidden by a vehicle
and others.
• Light (a streetlight) or a shadow is reflected on the surface of the sign.
• A sign is too bright or too dark (an electric sign).
• A sign of a small size.
■ Other conditions
• When you are driving at a high speed.
566
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving
The traffic sign recognition system may not operate correctly, such as displaying a
sign that does not follow the actual regulation for the roadway or does not exist at
all in the following cases.
u Regarding the speed limit sign, it may display higher or lower speed than the
actual speed limit.
• There is a supplementary sign with further information such as weather, time,
vehicle type, school zone, etc.
• Figures on the sign are hard to read (electric sign, numbers on the sign are
blurred).
• A sign is in the vicinity of the lane you are driving even though it is not for the lane
(speed limit sign situated at the junction between the side road and the main
road, etc.).
• There are things that look similar to the color or shape of the recognition object
(similar sign, electric sign, signboard, structure, etc.).
• A lorry and others stuck with the sticker of the speed limit sign on the back are
travelling in front of you.
567
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving
The speed limit sign icon is displayed on the right half of the screen.
■ Selecting to display traffic signs when main mode is off
You can continue displaying reduced-size traffic sign icon on the driver information
interface and head-up display
*
even while the main mode is not selected.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
■
Signs Displayed on the Driver information interface and Head-
Up Display
*
■
When main mode is selected
■
When main mode is not selected
Speed Limit Sign
Speed Limit Sign
Driver information interface
Head-up display
*
Driver information interface
Head-up display
*
* Not available on all models
568
uuHonda Sensing® uFront Sensor Camera
Driving
Front Sensor Camera
The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC
*
, ACC with LSF
*
, CMBS
TM
and traffic sign recognition system, is designed to detect an object that triggers any
of the systems to operate its functions.
This camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing
system to shut off, when parking, find a shady
area or face the front of the vehicle away from
the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do
not allow it to cover the camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on
it.
■
Camera Location and Handling Tips
1Front Sensor Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could
obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the
system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.
Front Sensor
Camera
* Not available on all models
569
uuHonda Sensing® uFront Sensor Camera
Driving
1Front Sensor Camera
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message
appears:
•
Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed towards the camera.
•
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Clean Front Windshield message
appears:
•
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
570
uuHonda Sensing® uRadar Sensor
Driving
Radar Sensor
The radar sensor is at the lower part of the
front bumper.
• Do not change the position of the radar
sensor or any of the surrounding parts.
• Do not apply paint, stickers, or attach non-
genuine accessories to the front part of the
radar sensor or the surrounding area. Be
particularly careful that any custom license
plate frame or other accessory does not
block any part of the radar beam path (see
adjacent illustration).
1Radar Sensor
Avoid strong impacts to the radar sensor cover.
For the CMBS
TM
to work properly:
•
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
•
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder
for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water
or a mild detergent.
•
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by using the safety
support switch and take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 CMBS
TM
On and Off P. 513
If the vehicle is involved in any of the following
situations, the radar sensor may not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
•
Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision.
•
Your vehicle drives through deep water or is
submerged in deep water.
•
Your vehicle strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock,
or embankment that could jar the radar sensor.
Radar
Sensor
The radar sensor is
at the lower part of
the front bumper.
Do not apply paint, stickers, or
attach accessories to the front
part of the radar sensor or the
surrounding area.
571
Continued
Driving
Braking
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the
parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.
■ To apply
The electric parking brake can be applied any
time the vehicle has battery, no matter which
position the power mode is in.
Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently
and securely.
u The indicator in the switch comes on.
u The parking brake indicator (red) comes
on.
■
Parking Brake
1Braking
When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a
whirring sound from the engine compartment. This is
because the brake system is in operation, and it is
normal.
1Parking Brake
You may hear the electric parking brake system
motor operating from the rear wheel area when you
apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.
The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric
parking brake system operation when you apply or
release the parking brake. This is normal.
You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the
battery goes dead.
2 Jump Starting P. 674
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake
switch while driving, the brakes on all four
wheels are applied by the VSA® system until the
vehicle comes to a stop. The electric parking
brake then applies, and the switch should be
released.
The engine will not start unless the electric parking
brake is engaged. If the vehicle stalls on a slope, the
electric parking brake system may automatically
engage. If it does not, engage it manually, then start
the engine again.
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/Continuously
variable transmission models
Electric Parking Brake Switch
Manual transmission models
Electric Parking Brake Switch
uuBrakinguBrake System
572
Driving
■ To release
The power mode must be in ON in order to
release the electric parking brake.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the electric parking brake switch.
u The indicator in the switch goes off.
u The parking brake indicator (red) goes
off.
Manually releasing the parking brake using
the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and
smoothly when facing down hill on steep hills.
1Parking Brake
In the following situations, the parking brake
automatically operates.
•
When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake
hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
•
When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped and the automatic brake
hold system is applied.
•
When the engine is turned off while the automatic
brake hold system is applied.
•
When there is a problem with the automatic brake
hold system while brake hold is applied.
•
When the vehicle is stops more than 10 minutes
while ACC with LSF is activated.
•
When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with
LSF.
•
When the engine is turned off while ACC with LSF
is activated.
•
When there is a problem with the electric parking
brake switch, after you set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF.
Models with ACC with LSF
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/Continuously
variable transmission models
Electric Parking Brake Switch
Manual transmission models
Electric Parking Brake Switch
Continued
573
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
■ Automatic parking brake feature operation
If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated:
• The parking brake is applied automatically when you set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF.
• To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake indicator
(red) is on.
2 P. 575
■ To release automatically
Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.
Depress the accelerator pedal while releasing the clutch pedal releases the parking
brake.
Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the
vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
When on a hill, it may require more
accelerator input to release.
u The indicator in the switch goes off.
u The parking brake indicator (red) goes
off.
1Parking Brake
If the parking brake cannot be released
automatically, release it manually.
When the vehicle is travelling uphill, the accelerator
pedal may need to be pressed farther to
automatically release the electric parking brake.
The parking brake cannot be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
•
Malfunction indicator lamp
•
Transmission indicator
The parking brake may not be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
•
Brake system indicator
•
VSA® system indicator
•
ABS indicator
•
Supplemental restraint system indicator
The clutch pedal is fully depressed before gently
depress the accelerator pedal and release the clutch
pedal.
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
All models
Accelerator Pedal
Automatic transmission/Continuously
variable transmission models
574
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
Gently depress the accelerator pedal and
release the clutch pedal.
u The indicator in the switch goes off.
u The parking brake indicator (red) goes
off.
The parking brake automatically releases as you depress the accelerator pedal when:
• You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
• The engine is running.
• The transmission is not in
(P or (N.
• The transmission is not in neutral.
Accelerator Pedal
Clutch Pedal
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
Continued
575
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
■ Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature
With the power mode is in ON, carry out the following steps to either activate or
deactivate the automatic parking brake feature.
1. Put the transmission into
(P.
2. Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up and release the parking brake switch.
u Check that the parking brake indicator (red) has come on.
3. Pull up and hold the parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping sound,
release the switch and within 3 seconds pull up and hold the switch again.
4. When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the
switch.
u Two beeps indicates that the feature has been activated.
u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated.
u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will
remain applied after you turn off the engine.
u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake
indicator (red) is on.
If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature for when putting your vehicle
through a conveyor type car wash, you can follow the procedure explained below.
1. Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and then within 2 seconds push down the
parking brake switch.
u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected.
u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both
ACC with LSF and the automatic brake hold system.
u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake
indicator (red) is on.
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
1Parking Brake
In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in
place if applied.
When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and
make sure the automatic parking brake feature is
deactivated.
Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyor-
type car wash or when having your vehicle towed,
deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and
leave the parking brake released.
Automatic transmission models
uuBrakinguBrake System
576
Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. The brake assist system
increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an
emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 582
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 581
■
Foot Brake
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear
indicator rubbing on the brake disk and indicates that
the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional
squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake
pedal, this may be normal and caused by high
frequency vibration of the brake pads against the
rotating brake disc.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear/speed position. With manual
transmission
*
use a lower gear for greater engine
braking.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
Whenever the brakes are activated by CMBS
TM
or
another system that automatically controls braking,
the brake pedal is depressed and released in
accordance with braking function.
* Not available on all models
Continued
577
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is
pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at
traffic lights and in heavy traffic.
■
Automatic Brake Hold
1Automatic Brake Hold
3
WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system
on steep hills or slippery roads may still
allow the vehicle to move if you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may
cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never activate the automatic brake hold
system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from
moving when stopped on a steep hill or
slippery roads.
3
WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to
park the vehicle may result in the vehicle
unexpectedly moving.
If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may
cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never leave the vehicle when braking is
temporarily kept by automatic brake hold
and always park the vehicle by putting the
transmission in
(P
*
and applying the
parking brake.
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
■
Turning on the system
Fasten your seat belt
properly, then start the
engine. Press the
automatic brake hold
button.
●
The automatic brake
hold system indicator
comes on. The system
is turned on.
■
Activating the system
Depress the brake pedal
to come to a complete
stop. The transmission
must be in
(D, (N, (S
*
or
(L
*
.
●
The automatic brake
hold indicator comes
on. Braking is kept for
up to 10 minutes.
●
Release the brake pedal
after the automatic
brake hold indicator
comes on.
■
Canceling the system
Depress the accelerator
pedal while the
transmission must be in
(D, (R, (S
*
or (L
*
. The
system is canceled and
the vehicle starts to
move.
●
The automatic brake
hold indicator goes
off. The system
continues to be on.
Accelerator PedalBrake PedalAutomatic Brake
Hold Button
Goes
Off
U.S.
Canada
On
On
Comes
On
Comes
On
Comes
On
* Not available on all models
578
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until you change a gear to a
position other than neutral and:
• Release the clutch pedal on a level road or when facing downhill.
• Release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal when facing uphill.
You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights
and in heavy traffic.
Manual transmission models
■
Turning on the system
Fasten your seat belt
properly, then start the
engine. Press the
automatic brake hold
button.
●
The automatic brake
hold system indicator
comes on. The system
is turned on.
■
Activating the system
Depress the brake pedal
to come to a complete
stop.
●
The automatic brake
hold indicator comes
on. Braking is kept for
up to 10 minutes.
●
Release the brake pedal
after the automatic
brake hold indicator
comes on.
■
Canceling the system
Shift into one of the
gears other than neutral
and:
●
Release the clutch
pedal on a level road
or when facing
downhill.
●
Release the clutch
pedal and depress the
accelerator pedal
when facing uphill.
The system is canceled
and the vehicle starts to
move.
●
The automatic brake
hold indicator goes off.
The system releases the
brake automatically.
Accelerator Pedal
Brake Pedal
Automatic Brake
Hold Button
Goes
Off
U.S.
Canada
Clutch Pedal
Comes
On
On
Comes
On
On
Comes
On
Continued
579
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
■ The system automatically cancels when:
• You engage the parking brake.
• You depress the brake pedal and put the transmission into
(P or (R.
■ The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when:
• Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
• The engine is turned off.
• Brake Hold System Problem. Apply Brake When Stopped. See Your
Dealer. appears on the driver information interface.
• There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.
• The engine stalls.
1Automatic Brake Hold
While the system is activated, you can turn off the
engine or park the vehicle through the same
procedure as you normally do.
2 When Stopped P. 583
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated,
the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is
off.
The system turns off if the engine stalls while
automatic brake hold is active or the system is on.
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
All models
Manual transmission models
uuBrakinguBrake System
580
Driving
■ Turning off the automatic brake hold system
While the system is on, press the automatic
brake hold button again.
u The automatic brake hold system
indicator goes off.
If you want to turn off automatic brake hold
while the system is in operation, press the
automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.
1Turning on the system
Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold
system before using an automated car wash.
You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves
while the automatic brake hold system is in
operation.
Automatic Brake
Hold Button
Goes
Off
Automatic transmission/Continuously
variable transmission models
Automatic Brake
Hold Button
Goes
Off
Manual transmission models
581
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Driving
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
■ ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:
• Wet or snow covered roads.
• Roads paved with stone.
• Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
■
ABS
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of
the wrong size or type.
If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there
may be a problem with the system. While normal
braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that
the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing
the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is
designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to
skidding and loss of steering control.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:
•
You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,
such as gravel or snow.
•
The tires are equipped with snow chains
*
.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:
•
Motor sounds coming from the engine
compartment when the brakes are applied, or
when system checks are being performed after the
engine has been started and while the vehicle
accelerates.
•
Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates.
These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS
systems and are no cause for concern.
* Not available on all models
582
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Driving
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
■
Brake Assist System
583
Continued
Driving
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully.
3. Put the transmission into
(P.
3. Put the transmission into
(R or (1.
4. Turn off the engine.
u The parking brake indicator (red) goes off in about 30 seconds.
Always confirm the electric parking brake is set, in particular if you are parked on an
incline.
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended
without confirming that Park is engaged.
A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash
resulting in serious injury or death.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal
until you have confirmed that
(P
is shown
on the gear position indicator.
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable
transmission models
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
All models
uuParking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped
584
Driving
1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
•
Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
•
Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
•
Putting the transmission into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake
may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are
expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if
parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so
they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the
slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from
moving. If you do not take either precaution, the
vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable
transmission models
585
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Continued
Driving
Parking Sensor System
*
The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the
beeper, driver information interface and audio/information screen let you know the
approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.
■ The sensor location and range
1Parking Sensor System
*
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is
no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.
The system may not work properly when:
•
The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud or
dirt.
•
The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill.
•
The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
•
The system is affected by devices that emit
ultrasonic waves.
•
Driving in bad weather.
The system may not sense:
•
Thin or low objects.
•
Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
or sponge.
•
Objects directly under the bumper.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less
Front Corner Sensors
Rear Corner Sensors
Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less
Rear Center Sensors
* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
586
Driving
■ Parking sensor system on and off
With the power mode in ON, press the
parking sensor system button to turn on or off
the system. The indicator in the button comes
on when the system is on.
The front corner, rear corner and rear center
sensors start to detect an obstacle when the
transmission is in
(R, and the vehicle speed is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The front corner sensors start to detect an
obstacle when the transmission is in any
position other than
(P, and the vehicle speed
is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
1Parking Sensor System
*
When you set the power mode to ON, the system will
be in the previously selected condition.
* Not available on all models
Continued
587
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
■ Screen Operation
You can switch between split view off and
split view on by touching the split screen tab.
1Screen Operation
The split screen tab disappears, and the split view
returns to the last camera view mode under the
following conditions:
•
If the parking sensor system is turned off.
•
If there is a malfunction in the system.
Split Screen
Tab
Split View Off
Split View On
588
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
■ When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles behind becomes shorter
*1:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.
Length of the
intermittent beep
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle
Indicator Audio/Information Screen
Corner Sensors Center Sensors
Moderate —
Rear: About 43-24 in
(110-60 cm)
Comes on in Yellow
*1
Short
About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm)
About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm)
Comes on in Amber
Very short
About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
Continuous
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
Comes on in Red
Indicators light where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
Indicators light where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
589
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF.
2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON.
3. Keep pressing the button for ten seconds. Release the button when the indicator
in the button blinks.
u The beeper sounds once.
4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off.
u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.
To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds
three times when the rear sensors come back on.
■
Turning off All Rear Sensors
1Turning off All Rear Sensors
When you put the transmission into
(R, the indicator
in the parking sensor system button blinks as a
reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off.
590
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
Driving
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts
you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.
The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.
1Cross Traffic Monitor
*
The parking sensor system’s alerting buzzer overrides
the Cross Traffic Monitor buzzer when the sensors
are detecting obstacles at the closest range.
3
CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all
approaching vehicles and may not detect
an approaching vehicle at all.
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
back up the vehicle before doing so may
result in a collision.
Do not solely rely on the system when
reversing; always also use your mirrors, and
look behind and to the sides of your vehicle
before reversing.
Models with parking sensor system
* Not available on all models
Continued
591
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
Driving
The system activates when:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The Cross Traffic Monitor system is turned
on.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 593
• The transmission is in (R.
• Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or
lower.
When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor
alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.
The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your
vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly
behind your vehicle.
The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your
vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.
■
How the System Works
1Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay
alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without
an approaching vehicle under the following
conditions:
•
An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,
near your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the
radar sensor’s scope.
•
Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph
(5 km/h) or higher.
•
A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than
between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25
km/h).
•
The system picks up external interference such as
other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong
radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
•
Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with
snow, ice, mud or dirt.
•
When there is bad weather.
•
Your vehicle is on an incline.
•
Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
•
Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a
vehicle, and so on.
The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly
repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper
corner area clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels
or stickers of any kind.
Radar sensors:
Underneath the rear bumper
corners
* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
592
Driving
An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information
screen.
■
When the System Detects a Vehicle
1When the System Detects a Vehicle
If the on the lower right changes to in amber
when the transmission is in
(R, mud snow or ice may
have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. The
system is temporarily canceled. Check the bumper
corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean
the area if necessary.
If the comes on when the transmission is in
(R,
there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic
Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
If the display remains the same with the transmission
in
(R, there may be a problem with the rear camera
system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.
Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Wide ViewNormal View
Arrow Icon
Top Down View
593
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
Driving
You can switch on and off the system using the audio/information screen.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Camera.
4. Select Cross Traffic Monitor.
5. Select ON or OFF, then select Save.
The system can also be turned on and off on
the audio/information screen by pressing the
CTM icon.
■
Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
CheckYourSurroundings
Icon
594
Driving
Multi-View Rear Camera
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the transmission is put into (R.
*1: Models with color audio
*2: Models with Display Audio
■
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 370, 381
Fixed Guideline
On
*1
/ON
*2
: Guidelines appear when you put the
transmission into
(R.
Off
*1
/OFF
*2
: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
On
*1
/ON
*2
: Guidelines move according to the
steering wheel direction.
Off
*1
/OFF
*2
: Guidelines do not move.
Top Down View Mode
Normal View Mode
Wide View Mode
Guidelines
Bumper
Camera
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
595
uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Continued
Driving
You can view three different camera modes on the audio/information screen.
Press the preset button(1-3) under the appropriate icon to switch the mode.
: Wide view mode
: Normal view mode
: Top down view mode
Touch the appropriate icon to switch the mode.
: Wide view mode
: Normal view mode
: Top down view mode
• If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view
mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into
(R.
• If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the engine, Wide
view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put
the transmission into
(R.
• If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took
the transmission out of (R, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you
put the transmission into
(R.
Models with color audio
Models with Display Audio
Models with color audio
596
uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Driving
• If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view
mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into
(R.
• If you were using Top down view mode before turning off the engine, the next
time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into (R, the view
mode you were using just before using Top down view mode (Wide view mode
or Normal view mode) will be activated.
• If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took
the transmission out of
(R, the view mode you were using just before selecting
Top down view mode (Wide view mode or Normal view mode) will be activated
the next time you put the transmission into (R.
Models with Display Audio
597
Driving
Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.
■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
■ Fuel tank capacity: 14.8 US gal (56 L)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
598
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
How to Refuel
Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle
directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler
nozzle.
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Unlock the driver’s door using the master
door lock switch.
u The fuel fill door on the outer side of the
vehicle will unlock.
2 Using the Master Door Lock Switch
P. 178
4. Press the area indicated by the arrow to
release the fuel fill door. You will hear a
click.
1How to Refuel
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only
service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of
smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon
fuel for other uses) or other non-service station
devices can damage the area in and around the filler
opening.
Use the master door lock switch to unlock the fuel fill
door.
The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically
relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can
be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the
driver’s door.
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
Master Door Lock Switch
Press
Fuel Fill Door
599
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
5. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the
lower part of filler opening, then insert it
slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the filler
nozzle goes down along with the filler
pipe.
u Keep the filler nozzle level.
u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will
click off automatically.
u After filling, wait about five seconds
before removing the filler nozzle.
6. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
P. 697
600
Driving
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO
2
Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO
2
emissions is dependent on several
factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and
vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the
rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
driver information interface.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
■
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO
2
Emissions
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liters of fuel
Kilometers
driven
L per 100 km
601
Driving
Turbo Engine Vehicle
Handling Precautions
The turbocharger is a high-precision device to obtain greater horsepower by
delivering a large volume of compressed air into the engine using a turbine driven by
the engine’s exhaust gas pressure.
• When the engine is cold just after starting, avoid revving the engine or sudden
acceleration.
• Always replace the engine oil and engine oil filter according to the Maintenance
Minder. The turbine rotates at very high speeds over 100,000 rpm and its
temperature reaches over 1,292°F (700°C). It is lubricated and cooled by engine
oil. If you fail to replace the engine oil and filter at the scheduled distance or
interval, deteriorated engine oil may cause failure such as sticking and abnormal
noise of the turbine bearing.
1Turbo Engine Vehicle
The scheduled maintenance intervals for replacing
the filter is indicated on the driver information
interface. Follow the information of when to replace
them.
2 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 607
The temperature gauge pointer is at the mark
when you restart the engine after driving under high
load conditions such as at high speed or in hilly
terrain. This is normal. The gauge goes down after
you idle or drive the vehicle for about one minute.
H
602
603
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 604
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 605
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 606
Maintenance Minder
TM
..................... 607
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 614
Opening the Hood ........................... 616
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 617
Oil Check......................................... 618
Adding Engine Oil............................ 620
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 621
Engine Coolant................................ 625
Transmission Fluid............................ 627
Brake/Clutch
*
Fluid.......................... 629
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 630
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 631
Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades .......................................... 639
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 642
Tire and Loading Information Label...... 643
Tire Labeling .................................... 643
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......645
Wear Indicators................................ 647
Tire Service Life................................ 647
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 648
Tire Rotation.................................... 649
Winter Tires ..................................... 650
Battery............................................... 651
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 653
Climate Control System Maintenance
.... 654
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 655
Exterior Care.................................... 657
Accessories and Modifications ........ 660
* Not available on all models
604
Maintenance
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.)
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch
*
Fluid P. 629
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 642
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 631
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 639
■
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 611
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 711
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
* Not available on all models
605
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given
task.
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
■
Maintenance Safety
■
Vehicle Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3
WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner’s manual.
3
WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner’s manual.
606
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Maintenance
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may
damage the engine cover and component parts.
2.0 L engine models
607
Maintenance
Maintenance Minder
TM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to
ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
608
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
To Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the driver information interface.
You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the (home) button.
3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed.
4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The
engine oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance
items due soon.
■
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 611
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
5 5 to 1
0 0
(home) Button
Engine Oil Life
Main Item Sub Item
Left Selector Wheel
609
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
■
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information
Interface
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
-
When you select the Maintenance
Minder screen, it displays codes for
maintenance items due at the next
engine oil change, along with the
percentage of engine oil life
remaining.
-
Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The engine oil life indicator starts to
appear along with other due-soon
maintenance item codes when the
remaining oil life drops to 15
percent.
The engine oil is approaching the end
of its service life.
610
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder
message.
Maintenance Due Now 5 % The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1
percent. Press the (home)
button to switch to another display.
The engine oil has almost reached the
end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be inspected
and serviced as soon as possible.
Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The engine oil has passed its service
life, and a negative distance appears
after driving over 10 miles (U.S.
models) or 10 km (Canadian
models). The negative distance on
the display blinks.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced immediately.
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
5 %
611
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
■
Maintenance Service Items
1Maintenance Service Items
•
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Maintenance Minder Message
System Message
Indicator
Sub Items
Main Item
U.S. models
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 709.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
●
Replace engine oil
*1
B
●
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
●
Inspect front and rear brakes
●
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
●
Inspect suspension components
●
Inspect driveshaft boots
●
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA®)
●
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
●
Inspect exhaust system
#
●
Inspect fuel lines and connections
#
*4:
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
●
Rotate tires
2
●
Replace air cleaner element
*2
●
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
●
Inspect drive belt
3
●
Replace transmission fluid
*4
4
●
Replace spark plugs
●
Inspect valve clearance
5
●
Replace engine coolant
7
●
Replace brake fluid
*6
Continuously variable transmission models
612
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
1Maintenance Service Items
•
Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3
if they are noisy.
Canadian models
*1: If a Maintenance Minder Message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4:
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder Message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 709.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
●
Replace engine oil
*1
0
●
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
Continuously variable transmission models
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
●
Rotate tires
2
●
Replace air cleaner element
*2
●
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
●
Inspect drive belt
3
●
Replace transmission fluid
*4
4
●
Replace spark plugs
●
Inspect valve clearance
5
●
Replace engine coolant
7
●
Replace brake fluid
*6
9
●
Service front and rear brakes
●
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
●
Inspect suspension components
●
Inspect driveshaft boots
●
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
●
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
●
Inspect exhaust system
#
●
Inspect fuel lines and connections
#
613
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the
maintenance service.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the (home) button.
3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed.
4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen.
5. Press the left selector wheel to enter the reset mode.
6. Roll the left selector wheel select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All Due
Items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
7. Press the left selector wheel to reset the selected item.
8. Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.
■
Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display
after a maintenance service results in the system
showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can
lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display after completing the required maintenance
service. If someone other than a dealer performs
maintenance service, reset the Maintenance
Minder
TM
display yourself.
You can reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display
using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 381
Models with Display Audio
Left Selector Wheel
(home) Button
614
Maintenance
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
1.5 L engine models
Brake/Clutch
*
Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank
Radiator Cap
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Battery
* Not available on all models
615
uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood
Maintenance
2.0 L engine models
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank
Radiator Cap
Brake/Clutch
*
Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Battery
* Not available on all models
616
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Maintenance
Opening the Hood
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
driver’s side lower corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push the hood latch lever (located under
the front edge of the hood to the center)
and raise the hood. Once you have raised
the hood slightly, you can release the lever.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in damage
to the hood and/or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may
damage the engine cover and component parts.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
2.0 L engine models
Hood Release Handle
Pull
Lever
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
617
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown.
■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
• Genuine Honda Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
Ambient Temperature
618
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Maintenance
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
619
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Maintenance
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
620
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Maintenance
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Engine Oil Fill Cap
621
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Continued
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver
information interface.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the Phillips-head screws and
slotted head screws by turning 90°
counterclockwise on the undercarriage.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
Under Cover
Screw
Under Cover
Screw
622
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
Drain Bolt
Washer
Drain Bolt
Washer
623
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Continued
Maintenance
5. Remove the slotted head screws by
turning 90° counterclockwise on the
undercarriage and remove the under
cover.
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
Under Cover
Screw
Under Cover
Screw
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
624
Maintenance
6. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
7. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
8. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the filter gasket.
9. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
10. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
3.7 US qt (3.5 L)
5.0 US qt (4.8 L)
11. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
12. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
13. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
Oil Filter
Oil Filter
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
625
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Continued
Maintenance
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
u If the coolant level is below the MIN
mark, add the specified coolant until it
reaches the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
■
Reserve Tank
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your
vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures
below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the
coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for
details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Reserve
Tank
MAX
MIN
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
626
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counter-
clockwise and relieve any pressure in the
cooling system.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
■
Radiator
1Radiator
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
Radiator Cap
627
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Continued
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the automatic transmission fluid yourself.
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the automatic transmission fluid yourself.
■
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
*
Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid
■
Manual Transmission Fluid
*
Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
*
NOTICE
Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle’s transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda’s
new vehicle limited warranty.
1Manual Transmission Fluid
*
NOTICE
If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API
certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil
as a temporary measure.
Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does
not contain the proper additives for the transmission
and continued use can cause decreased shifting
performance and lead to transmission damage.
* Not available on all models
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
628
Maintenance
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the automatic transmission fluid yourself.
■
Automatic Transmission Fluid
*
Specified fluid: Honda Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF-Type 2.0
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
*
NOTICE
Do not mix Honda ATF-Type 2.0 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda
ATF-Type 2.0 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage
the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF-Type 2.0 is not
covered by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty.
* Not available on all models
629
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch
*
Fluid
Maintenance
Brake/Clutch
*
Fluid
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reserve
tank.
The brake fluid reserve tank is also used for
your vehicle’s clutch fluid. As long as you keep
the brake fluid level as instructed above, there
is no need for checking the clutch fluid level.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■
Checking the Brake Fluid
1Brake/Clutch
*
Fluid
NOTICE
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
Reserve Tank
MIN
MAX
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
630
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Maintenance
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears
on the driver information interface.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
Use only commercially available windshield washer
fluid. Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent
lime scale build up.
Canadian models
All models
631
Continued
Maintenance
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
High beam headlight: LED type
*
High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
*
Low beam headlight: LED type
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer
*
, have the
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Models with halogen high beam headlights
All models
Models with halogen high beam headlights
* Not available on all models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
632
Maintenance
1. Remove the hose and the holding clip using
a flat-tip screwdriver, then remove the
upper part of the window washer reserve
tank.
u Check the amount of window washer
fluid is below the upper part of the
window washer reserve tank and remove
it.
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it clockwise.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
■
High Beam Headlights
1High Beam Headlights
High beam headlights are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
then lift and remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is
flat.
Models with LED high beam headlights
Push until the pin
is flat.
Models with halogen high beam headlights
Holding clip
Hose
Passenger side
Tab
Coupler
Bulb
Both sides
■
Low Beam Headlights
633
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Lights
*
Maintenance
Fog Lights
*
Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the
light assembly.
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.
Front Turn Signal Lights
Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
Front Side Marker Lights
Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights
*
Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.
* Not available on all models
634
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Lights and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Brake, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Lights and Rear
Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Pry on the edge of the cover using a flat-tip
screwdriver to remove the covers.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.
2. Remove the bolts.
3. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
Brake Light: LED
Taillight: LED
Rear Side Marker Light: LED
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
1Brake, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Lights and Rear Turn Signal
Light Bulbs
Brake and rear side marker/taillights are LED type.
Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace
the light assembly.
Cover
Bolts
635
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Lights and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Maintenance
4. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
5. Push and turn the old bulb clockwise and
remove it, and insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Socket
636
uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight, Brake Light
*
and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Taillight, Brake Light
*
and Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Taillight: LED
Brake Light
*
: LED
Back-Up Light: 16 W
1Taillight, Brake Light
*
and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Taillights and brake lights
*
are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
then lift and remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is flat.
Clip
Push until the
pin is flat.
Holding Clip
Bulb
Socket
Driver side
* Not available on all models
637
uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight, Brake Light
*
and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Maintenance
2. Turn the socket clockwise and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Socket
Passenger side
638
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light
Maintenance
Rear License Plate Light
Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
High-Mount Brake Light
High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
639
Continued
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
2. While holding the wiper switch in the
MIST position, set the power mode to ON,
then to VEHICLE OFF.
u Both wiper arms are set to the
maintenance position as shown in the
image.
3. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it
may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.
640
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
4. Press and hold the tab, then slide the
holder off the wiper arm.
5. Pull the end of the wiper blade in the
direction of the arrow in the image until it
is out of the holder’s end cap.
6. Pull the wiper blade in the opposite
direction to slide it out of its holder.
Tab
Blade
End Cap At
The Bottom
Blade
Holder
641
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
7. Insert the flat side of the new wiper blade
onto the bottom part of the holder. Insert
the blade all the way.
8. Install the end of the wiper blade into the
cap.
9. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm until it
locks.
10. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
11. Set the power mode to ON and hold the
wiper switch in the MIST position until
both wiper arms return to the standard
position.
Holder
Blade
Cap
642
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.
Under inflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all
tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1–2 psi (10–20 kPa,
0.1–0.2 kgf/cm
2
) per month.
■ Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 647
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm
2
) higher than if
checked when cold.
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 497
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before
long trips.
3
WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
643
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Continued
Maintenance
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described as shown.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a
The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b
The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c
The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d
The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
Label
Example
Example
Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■
Tire Sizes
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
P235/60 R18 102T
P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
235: Tire width in millimeters.
60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
18: Rim diameter in inches.
102: Load index (a numerical code associated with
the maximum load the tire can carry).
T: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
644
Maintenance
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
■
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
■
Glossary of Tire Terminology
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
645
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Continued
Maintenance
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
■
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
■
Treadwear
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
646
Maintenance
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
■
Traction
■
Temperature
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
647
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
Maintenance
Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
1Checking Tires
High speed driving
We recommend that you do not drive faster than the
posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive
at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h),
adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to
avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.
Tire Size 225/50R17 94V
Pressure Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Tire Size 235/40R19 96V
Pressure Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
)
Models with 225/50R17 tires
Models with 235/40R19 tires
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
648
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Maintenance
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and
Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3
WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
649
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information
interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 497
FRONT
Direction Mark
Front
Front
650
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire
chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
• Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036
Not recommended to use any type of chains
1Winter Tires
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
3
WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
Models with 225/50R17 tires
Models with 235/40R19 tires
651
Maintenance
Battery
Checking the Battery
The condition of the battery is monitored by a
sensor located on the negative terminal of the
battery. If there is a problem with this sensor,
the driver information interface will display a
warning message. If this happens, have you
vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Check the battery terminals for corrosion
monthly.
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 247
• The clock resets.
2 Clock P. 164
• The immobilizer system needs to be reset.
2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 95
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
3
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
Canadian models
652
uuBatteryuCharging the Battery
Maintenance
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
1Charging the Battery
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Consult a dealer for more information.
The Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist® (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
(ACC) with low speed follow (LSF)
*
, adaptive cruise
control (ACC)
*
, safety support and low tire pressure/
TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a
message in the driver information interface when you
set the power mode to ON after re-connecting a
battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/
h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
653
Maintenance
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Remove the built-in key.
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the remote.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
3
WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD
The battery that powers the remote can
cause severe internal burns and can even
lead to death if swallowed.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children.
If you suspect that a child has swallowed
the battery, seek medical attention
immediately.
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
654
Maintenance
Climate Control System Maintenance
Air Conditioning
To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE
J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians.
Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one
removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and
labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.
Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance Minder
TM
messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Air Conditioning
NOTICE
Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment.
To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the
evaporator with one removed from a used or
salvaged vehicle.
Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
flammable and can be ignited during servicing if
proper procedures are not followed.
The air conditioner label is found under the hood:
2 Safety Labels P. 76
2 Specifications P. 700, 702
Canadian models
: Caution
: Flammable Refrigerant
: Requires Registered
Technician to Service
: Air Conditioning
System
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
contact a dealer for replacement.
655
Continued
Maintenance
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
■
Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical
devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are
splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may
cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside
the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently
used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Opening
■
Cleaning the Window
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass
cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front
sensor camera and the rainfall/light sensor
*
.
* Not available on all models
uuCleaninguInterior Care
656
Maintenance
The driver’s floor mat hooks over floor
anchors, which keep them from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mats.
To properly clean leather:
1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%
water and 10% neutral soap.
3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.
■
Floor Mats
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Lock
Unlock
■
Maintaining Genuine Leather
*
1Maintaining Genuine Leather
*
It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as
soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting
in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the
leather. In addition, please note that some dark
colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats
resulting in discoloration or stains.
* Not available on all models
657
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Continued
Maintenance
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
• Fold in the door mirrors.
• Automatic intermittent wiper equipment vehicles, wipers switch to OFF.
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
■
Washing the Vehicle
■
Using an Automated Car Wash
■
Using High Pressure Cleaners
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
cause a malfunction.
Do not spray water onto the fuel fill door directly. A
high-pressure spray may cause it to open.
Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the
fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel
system or engine.
If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the
windshield, first set the wiper arms to the
maintenance position.
2 Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber P. 639
Air Intake Vents
1Using an Automated Car Wash
When using an automated car wash that pulls the
vehicle through with a conveyor, make sure vehicle is
in car wash mode.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in
(N
position [car wash mode] P. 478
Automatic transmission models
uuCleaninguExterior Care
658
Maintenance
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent
to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals
(including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish
on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish,
the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains,
wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.
■
Applying Wax
■
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
■
Cleaning the Window
■
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
1Applying Wax
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
659
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
■
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
660
Maintenance
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or
backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 688
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
1Accessories and Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3
WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
661
uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications
Maintenance
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or
reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar
effect.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance.
Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not
make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle
to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle
is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other
devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely
affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly
resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.
Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.
662
663
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools.................................. 664
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire......................... 665
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine........................ 671
If the Remote Battery is Weak.......672
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 673
Jump Starting.................................... 674
Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 677
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 679
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears ...681
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 681
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 682
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 683
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake
System Indicator (Amber) Comes On.... 684
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On ....................... 685
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 686
If the Transmission Indicator Blinks along
with the Warning Message ............ 687
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 688
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 692
Emergency Towing........................... 693
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill
Door................................................. 694
When You Cannot Open the Trunk ... 695
Refueling........................................... 697
665
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking
brake.
2. Put the transmission into
(P.
2. Move the shift lever to
(R.
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
1Changing a Flat Tire
Follow these compact spare precautions:
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
NOTICE
Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly.
Call your dealer or a professional towing service.
Do not mount the compact spare on the front.
If either front tire goes flat, remove the rear tire on
the same side, and mount the compact spare on the
rear and the rear tire on the front.
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
All models
666
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2. Take the tool case out of the trunk.
3. Take the jack, wheel nut wrench and jack
handle bar out of the tool case.
4. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
5. Place a wheel block or rock in the front and
rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
■
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Tool Case
Spare Tire
Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
667
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
668
Handling the Unexpected
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise (as shown
in the image) until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
■
How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
•
Do not use while the engine is running.
•
Use only where the ground is firm and level.
•
Use only at the jacking points.
•
Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
•
Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Jacking Points
Jacking Point
Jack
Handle
Bar
Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
Continued
669
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop
rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)
■
Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
670
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the center cap.
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench
back in the tool case. Store the case in the
trunk.
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), Tire
Pressure Monitor System Problem. Check Tire Pressure. See Your Dealer. will
appear on the driver information interface and the indicator will start blinking for a
short time and then stay on; however, this is normal and is no cause for concern.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 497
■
Storing the Flat Tire
1Storing the Flat Tire
3
WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
Center Cap
Spacer Cone
Wing Bolt
For
compact
spare tire
For
full-size
tire
■
TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire
671
Handling the Unexpected
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
Starter condition Checklist
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
Check for a message on the driver information interface.
●
If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears
2 If the Remote Battery is Weak P. 672
uMake sure the remote is in its operating range.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 190
Check brightness of the interior lights.
Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.
●
If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Battery P. 651
●
If the interior lights come on normally
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 692
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with a
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.
2 Starting the Engine P. 465, 466, 467
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2 Immobilizer System P. 183
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 137
Check the fuses.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 692
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 693
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 674
672
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Remote Battery is Weak
Handling the Unexpected
If the Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message
appears on the driver information interface, and the ENGINE START/STOP button
flashes, and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows:
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the
remote while the ENGINE START/STOP
button is flashing. The buttons on the
remote should be facing you.
u The ENGINE START/STOP button
flashes for about 30 seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal (automatic
transmission/continuously variable
transmission) or clutch pedal (manual
transmission) and press the ENGINE
START/STOP button within 10 seconds
after the beeper sounds and the ENGINE
START/STOP button changes from
flashing to on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
673
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the
transmission to utilize engine braking.
The transmission automatically changes to
(P after the vehicle comes to a complete
stop. Then, the power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into
(P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake
pedal.
The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.
1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be turned off.
Automatic transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models for Canadian models
Manual transmission models
674
Handling the Unexpected
Jump Starting
Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Open the cover on the positive + terminal.
2. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle’s battery + terminal.
3. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using an automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery,
select a lower charging voltage than
15-volt. Check the charger manual for
the proper setting.
4. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
1Jump Starting
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
3
WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Booster Battery
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
Booster Battery
Continued
675
uuJump StartinguJump Starting Procedure
Handling the Unexpected
5. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable
to any other part.
6. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
7. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
1Jump Starting
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
Engine Mounting Bolt
Engine Mounting Bolt
uuJump StartinguJump Starting Procedure
676
Handling the Unexpected
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
■
What to Do After the Engine Starts
1What to Do After the Engine Starts
The Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist® (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
(ACC) with low speed follow (LSF)
*
, adaptive cruise
control (ACC)
*
, safety support and low tire pressure/
TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a
message in the driver information interface when you
set the power mode to ON after re-connecting a
battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
677
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the built-in key from the remote.
3. Open the center pocket.
2 Center Pocket P. 223
4. Remove the cover in the center pocket.
5. Wrap a cloth around the tip of the built-in
key. Put it into the shift lock release slot (as
shown in the image) and remove the cover.
■
Releasing the Lock
Continuously variable transmission models
Models without wireless charger
Cover
Models without wireless charger
Slot
Cover
All models
678
uuShift Lever Does Not Moveu
Handling the Unexpected
6. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
7. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button, and place the shift
lever into
(N.
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
Release Button
Shift Lock
Release Slot
679
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The temperature gauge pointer is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
• Engine Temperature Too Hot. Do Not Drive. Allow Engine To Cool.
message appears on the driver information interface.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
■ First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
pointer at the mark may damage the engine.
3
WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
H
H
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
680
Handling the Unexpected
■ Next thing to do
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge pointer comes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature gauge pointer has come down, resume driving. If it has not come
down, contact a dealer for repairs.
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
MAX
Reserve Tank
MIN
681
Handling the Unexpected
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears
■ Reasons for the warning to appear
Appears when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the warning
appears
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights
on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for
approximately three minutes.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
2 Oil Check P. 618
3. Start the engine and check the low oil
pressure warning.
u The warning disappears: Start driving
again.
u The warning does not disappear:
Immediately stop the engine and contact
a dealer for repairs.
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
682
uu
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
u
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
• Comes on if there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes with the engine stopped until it cools.
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
683
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
■ Reason for the indicator to blink
• There is a problem with the electric parking brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability during sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same
time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes
on, the parking brake may not work.
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On or Blinks at the Same Time When the
Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
P. 684
If you repeatedly operate the electric parking brake in
a short period of time, the brake stops operating to
prevent heating of the system and the indicator
blinks.
It returns to its original state in approximately 1
minute.
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
684
uu
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
u
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System
Indicator (Amber) Comes On
■If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the
same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,
release the parking brake manually or automatically.
2 Parking Brake P. 571
• If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at
the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,
stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer
immediately.
u Preventing the vehicle from moving
Put the transmission into (P.
Move to shift lever to
(1 or (R.
• If only the brake system indicator (red) is turned off, avoid using the
parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
1
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same
Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able
to release it.
If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake
system indicator (amber) come on at the same time,
the parking brake is working.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same
time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes
on, the parking brake may not work because it is
checking the system.
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
685
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
• Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
686
uu
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
u
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one
minute, and then stays on.
If the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator will either come on or
it will first blink for about one minute, then stay on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 497
If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to come on, change the
tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to first blink, and then stay on, change the
tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 497
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
687
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message
Handling the Unexpected
If the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the
Warning Message
■ Reasons for the indicator to blink
The transmission is malfunctioning.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks
• Immediately have your vehicle inspected by
a dealer.
• Put the transmission into
(N after starting
the engine.
u Check if the (N position on the driver
information interface and the indicator
on the
(N button light/blink.
2 Starting the Engine P. 465
Automatic transmission models
1If the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the Warning
Message
You may not be able to start the engine.
Make sure to set the parking brake when parking
your vehicle.
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow
your vehicle.
2 Emergency Towing P. 693
688
Handling the Unexpected
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Located near the battery. Push the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
■
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Tab
689
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1 BATTERY 125 A
2
− (70 A)
EPS 70 A
−(30A)
FUSE BOX MAIN 2 60 A
EBB 40 A
ABS/VSA FSR 40 A
−(30A)
IG MAIN1 30 A
3
REAR DEFROSTER 40 A
FUSE BOX MAIN 1 60 A
− (30 A)
HEATER MOTOR 40 A
− (40 A)
ST MG 30 A
SUB FAN MOTOR 30 A
− (30 A)
4
−(30A)
FUSE BOX OP 2
*
(70 A)
−(40A)
FUSE BOX OP 1 60 A
5
− (40 A)
MAIN FAN MOTOR 30 A
SPM2 30 A
ABS/VSA MOTOR 40 A
IG MAIN2 30 A
WIPER MOTOR 30 A
6SRM1 30A
7 − −
8− −
9 STOP LIGHT 10 A
10 TCU
*
(15 A)
11 INJ 20 A
12 TCU2
*
(10 A)
13 IGP 15 A
14 TCU3
*
(10 A)
15 FI ECU 10 A
16 BATT SNSR 7.5 A
17 DBW 15 A
18 IG COIL 15 A
19 HAZARD 15 A
20 − −
21 − −
22 H/STRG
*
(10 A)
23 − −
24 AUDIO 15 A
25 REAR H/SEAT
*
(20 A)
26 FR WIPER DEICER
*
(15 A)
Circuit Protected Amps
27 BACK UP 10 A
28 HORN 10 A
29 FR FOG LIGHT
*
(10 A)
30 SHUTTER GRILLE
*
(7.5 A)
31 MG CLUTCH 10 A
32 WASHER MOTOR 15 A
33 − −
34 − (10 A)
35 AUDIO SUB
*
(7.5 A)
36 IGPS 7.5 A
37 IGPS (LAF) 7.5 A
38 VB ACT 7.5 A
39 IG1 TCU
*
(10 A)
40 IG1 FUEL PUMP 20 A
41 IG1 ABS/VSA 7.5 A
42 IG1 ACG 10 A
43 IG1 ST MOTOR 10 A
44 IG1 MONITOR 7.5 A
45 − −
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
690
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side panel.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.
■
Interior Fuse Box
Fuse Label
691
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1 − −
2 L SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A
3 R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A
4 ACC 10 A
5 ACC KEY LOCK 7.5 A
6 SRS 10 A
7 − −
8 IG HOLD2
*
(10 A)
9 SMART 10 A
10 − −
11 L SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A
12 DR DOOR LOCK (10 A)
13 R SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A
14
OPTION
10 A
15 DRL 10 A
16 CTR ACC SOCKET (20 A)
17 MOON ROOF
*
(20 A)
18 − −
19 − −
20 SBW ECU
*
(10 A)
21 DR DOOR UNLOCK (10 A)
22 − −
23 − −
24 PREMIUM AMP
*
(20 A)
25 − −
26 − −
27 − −
28 − −
29 − −
30 − −
31 − −
32 IG HOLD3
*
(15 A)
33 DR P/SEAT SLI
*
(20 A)
34 AS P/SEAT SLI
*
(20 A)
35 OPTION2 10 A
36 METER 10 A
37 OPTION1 10 A
38 DR P/SEAT REC
*
(20 A)
39 AS P/SEAT REC
*
(20 A)
40 DR P/LUMBAR
*
(10 A)
41 − −
42 AVS
*
(20 A)
43 OPTION 10 A
44 ADS
*
(20 A)
45 − −
46 SRS 10 A
47 − −
48 HUD
*
(10 A)
49 DOOR LOCK 20 A
50 FR ACC SOCKET 20 A
51 RR R P/W 20 A
52 RR L P/W 20 A
Circuit Protected Amps
53 AS P/W 20 A
54 DR P/W 20 A
55 − −
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
692
uu
Fuses
u
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Open the fuse box cover in the engine
compartment.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with
the fuse puller and replace it with a new
one.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and
confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.
2 Fuse Locations P. 688
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.
Combined
Fuse
Blown Fuse
Fuse Puller
693
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
■ Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle’s weight.
Make sure the parking brake is released. If you
cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must
be transported by the flat bed equipment.
2 Parking Brake P. 571
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
694
Handling the Unexpected
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Pull the release handle toward you.
u The fuel fill door unlocks.
3. Open the fuel fill door.
2 How to Refuel P. 598
■
What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
1When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
Release Handle
695
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
When You Cannot Open the Trunk
If you cannot open the trunk, use the following procedure.
1. Remove the driver side rear outer head
restraint.
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 218
2. Remove the built-in key from the remote.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of the built-in
key. Put it into the cover (as shown in the
image) and remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the cylinder and turn the
key to the right.
u The trunk unlocks and opens.
■
What to Do When Unable to Open the Trunk
1When You Cannot Open the Trunk
Following up:
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
Cover
Models with adjustable headrest
All models
Key
Models with the cylinder in the cover
696
uuWhen You Cannot Open the Trunku
Handling the Unexpected
4. Pull the trunk release handle up in the
direction of the arrow in the image.
u The trunk unlocks and opens.
Trunk Release Handle
Models without the cylinder in the cover
697
Handling the Unexpected
Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Press on the edge of the fuel fill door until
you hear a click when the driver’s door is
unlocked.
u The fuel fill door opens.
3. Take the funnel out of the tool case in the
trunk.
2 Types of Tools P. 664
4. Place the end of the funnel on the lower
part of filler opening, then insert it slowly
and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the funnel
goes down along with the filler pipe.
5. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel
container.
u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.
6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck.
u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before
storing it.
7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
NOTICE
Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container
or any funnel other than the one provided with your
vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.
Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel
tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel
system and its seal.
Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is
gasoline before you refuel.
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
Funnel
698
699
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 700
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number ......................................... 704
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 705
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 706
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 707
Warranty Coverages ........................ 709
Authorized Manuals......................... 711
700
Information
Specifications
■ Vehicle Specifications
■ Air Conditioning
Model ACCORD
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
Charge Quantity 13.9 – 15.7 oz (395 – 445 g)
Lubricant Type ND-OIL 14
Quantity 5.6 – 6.5 cu-in (92 – 107 cm
3
)
1.5 L engine models
■ Engine Specifications
■ Fuel
■ Washer Fluid
Displacement 91.38 cu-in (1,498 cm
3
)
Spark Plugs NGK DILKAR8P8SY
Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 14.8 US gal (56 L)
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)
■ Light Bulbs
*1: Models with halogen high beam headlights
*2: Models with LED high beam headlights
Headlights (Low Beam) LED
Headlights (High Beam)
60W (HB3)
*1
LED
*2
Fog Lights
*
LED
Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED
Front Turn Signal Lights LED
Front Side Marker Lights LED
Side Turn Signal Lights
(on Door Mirrors)
*
LED
Brake Lights LED
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Taillights LED
Back-Up Lights 16W
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Light LED
Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W
Ceiling Light 8W
Ambient Lights LED
Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W
Center Pocket Light LED
Door Courtesy Lights
*
2CP (3.8W)
Door Inner Handle Lights
*
LED
Trunk Light 5W
Console Compartment Light
*
LED
* Not available on all models
701
uuSpecificationsu
Continued
Information
■ Brake/Clutch
*
Fluid
■ Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid
*
■ Manual Transmission Fluid
*
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid
Capacity Change 3.9 US qt (3.7 L)
Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
Capacity Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 L)
■ Engine Oil
■ Engine Coolant
*1: Continuously variable transmission models
*2: Manual transmission models
Recommended
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 3.4 US qt (3.2 L)
Change
including
filter
3.7 US qt (3.5 L)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.59 US gal (6.03 L)
*1
1.56 US gal (5.90 L)
*2
(change including the remaining
0.17 US gal (0.66 L) in the reserve tank)
■ Tire
*1: U.S. LX, EX, EX-L, EX-LN models and Canadian LX, SE, EX-L
models
*2: U.S. Sport, Touring models and Canadian Sport, Touring models
Regular
Size
225/50R17 94V
*1
235/40R19 96V
*2
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
Front
32 (220 [2.2])
*1
33 (225 [2.25])
*2
Rear
32 (220 [2.2])
*1
33 (225 [2.25])
*2
Compact
Spare
Size
T135/90D16 102M
*1
T135/80D17 103M
*2
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size
Regular
17 x 7 1/2J
*1
19 x 8 1/2J
*2
Compact Spare
16 x 4T
*1
17 x 4T
*2
* Not available on all models
702
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■ Vehicle Specifications
■ Air Conditioning
Model ACCORD
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
Charge Quantity 13.9 – 15.7 oz (395 – 445 g)
Lubricant Type ND-OIL 14
Quantity 5.6 – 6.5 cu-in (92 – 107 cm
3
)
2.0 L engine models
■ Engine Specifications
■ Fuel
■ Washer Fluid
Displacement 121.76 cu-in (1,996 cm
3
)
Spark Plugs NGK DILKAR8P8SY
Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 14.8 US gal (56 L)
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)
■ Light Bulbs
*1: Models with halogen high beam headlights
*2: Models with LED high beam headlights
Headlights (Low Beam) LED
Headlights (High Beam)
60W (HB3)
*1
LED
*2
Fog Lights LED
Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED
Front Turn Signal Lights LED
Front Side Marker Lights LED
Side Turn Signal Lights
(on Door Mirrors)
LED
Brake Lights LED
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Taillights LED
Back-Up Lights 16W
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Light LED
Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W
Ceiling Light 8W
Ambient Lights LED
Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W
Center Pocket Light LED
Door Courtesy Lights
*
2CP (3.8W)
Door Inner Handle Lights
*
LED
Trunk Light 5W
Console Compartment Light
*
LED
* Not available on all models
703
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■ Brake/Clutch
*
Fluid
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
*
■ Manual Transmission Fluid
*
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified
Honda Automatic Transmission Fluid
ATF-type 2.0
Capacity Change 4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
Capacity Change 2.27 US qt (2.15 L)
■ Engine Oil
■ Engine Coolant
Recommended
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 4.6 US qt (4.4 L)
Change
including
filter
5.0 US qt (4.8 L)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.34 US gal (5.06 L)
(change including the remaining
0.17 US gal (0.66 L) in the reserve tank)
■ Tire
*1: U.S. EX-L, EX-LN models
*2: U.S. Sport, Touring models and Canadian Sport, Touring models
Regular
Size
225/50R17 94V
*1
235/40R19 96V
*2
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
32 (220 [2.2])
*1
33 (225 [2.25])
*2
Front
Rear
32 (220 [2.2])
*1
33 (225 [2.25])
*2
Compact
Spare
Size T135/80D17 103M
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size
Regular
17 x 7 1/2J
*1
19 x 8 1/2J
*2
Compact Spare 17 x 4T
* Not available on all models
704
Information
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number,
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are
shown as follows.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and
Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.
Cover
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
Manual Transmission
Number
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
Number
2.0 L engine models
1.5 L engine models
Engine Number
Automatic Transmission
Number
Vehicle Identification Number
Manual Transmission
Number
705
Information
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements
and standards of the regulation listed below:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
706
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
707
Continued
Information
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness codes as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some States use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The
malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in
(P (automatic transmission/continuously variable
transmission) or neutral (manual transmission). Increase the engine speed to
2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about 3 minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
708
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D (automatic transmission/continuously variable transmission) or 5th (manual
transmission). Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is
okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total
of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
709
Continued
Information
Warranty Coverages
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
710
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
■ EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report
violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Transportation and Air Quality
Compliance Division, Light-Duty Vehicle Group
Attn: Warranty Complaints
2000 Traverwood Drive
Ann Arbor, MI 48105
Email: [email protected]
711
Information
Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■ For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at 1(800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
■ For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
712
Information
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal
with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced
with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda
Customer Services.
U.S. Owners
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 100-5E-8A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: [email protected]
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
•
Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number P. 704
•
Date of purchase
•
Odometer reading of your vehicle
•
Your name, address, and telephone number
•
A detailed description of the problem
•
Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Index
713
Index
Index
Numbers
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode ................... 486
Operation ............................................... 487
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 581
Accessories and Modifications ................ 660
Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 228
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).. 99, 100, 535
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF) ................... 99, 100, 519
Adaptive Damper System ........................ 493
Additives
Coolant .................................................. 625
Engine Oil ............................................... 617
Washer ................................................... 630
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 617
Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 219
Front Seats.............................................. 210
Head Restraints....................................... 216
Mirrors.................................................... 208
Rear Seats............................................... 214
Steering Wheel ....................................... 207
Agile Handling Assist............................... 496
Air Conditioning System
(Climate Control System) ....................... 239
Changing the Mode................................ 239
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 240
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 654
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 239
Sensors.................................................... 242
Synchronized Mode................................. 241
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 239
Air Pressure ............................... 643, 701, 703
Airbags ........................................................ 45
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 51
After a Collision......................................... 48
Airbag Care............................................... 60
Event Data Recorder .................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 48
Indicator.............................................. 58, 90
Knee Airbags............................................. 52
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ......... 59
Sensors...................................................... 45
Side Airbags .............................................. 55
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 57
AM/FM Radio .................................... 259, 298
Ambient Lights ......................................... 222
Android Auto
TM
........................................ 339
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 581
Indicator.................................................... 90
Apple CarPlay®.......................................... 336
Armrest ..................................................... 219
Audio Remote Controls............................ 248
Audio System ............................................ 244
Adjusting the Sound........................ 257, 292
Audio/Information Screen ................ 253, 274
Display Setup................................... 258, 293
Error Messages ........................................ 343
General Information ................................ 348
Home Screen........................................... 279
How to Update Wirelessly ....................... 286
How to Update with a USB Device........... 290
How to use Siri ® Eyes Free .............. 272, 335
iPod ................................................ 261, 313
Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 294
MP3/WMA/AAC.............................. 266, 316
Near Field Communication (NFC)............. 332
Pandora®................................................. 264
Reactivating ............................................ 247
Remote Controls ..................................... 248
Security Code.......................................... 247
Selecting an Audio Source....................... 294
Status Area ............................................. 284
System Updates....................................... 286
Theft Protection ...................................... 247
USB Flash Drives...................... 266, 316, 349
USB Ports ................................................ 245
Wallpaper Setup.............................. 255, 277
Audio/Information Screen ............... 253, 274
Authorized Manuals ................................ 711
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 179
Customize....................................... 379, 397
Auto High-Beam....................................... 197
Indicator.................................................... 90
Automatic Brake Hold ............................. 577
Indicator............................................ 82, 577
Automatic Brake Hold System
Indicator............................................ 82, 577
Automatic Intermittent Wipers............... 201
714
Index
Automatic Lighting .................................. 194
Automatic Transmission
Creeping ................................................. 474
Fluid ........................................................ 628
Kickdown ................................................ 474
Shift Operation ........................................ 476
Shifting.................................................... 475
Average Fuel Economy............................. 143
Average Speed.......................................... 145
B
Battery....................................................... 651
Charging System Indicator ................. 84, 681
Jump Starting .......................................... 674
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ........ 651
Maintenance (Replacing).......................... 653
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 38
Beverage Holders...................................... 226
Blind spot information System ................ 502
Bluetooth® Audio ............................. 269, 319
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ............. 403, 427
Booster Seats (For Children)....................... 74
Brake System............................................. 571
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 581
Automatic Brake Hold.............................. 577
Brake Assist System ................................. 582
Fluid ........................................................ 629
Foot Brake ............................................... 576
Indicator.............................. 79, 80, 683, 684
Parking Brake .......................................... 571
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel).... 203
Bulb Replacement .................................... 631
Brake, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Lights and
Rear Turn Signal Light............................ 634
Fog Lights ............................................... 633
Front Side Marker Lights.......................... 633
Front Turn Signal Lights........................... 633
Headlights............................................... 631
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 638
Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. 633
Rear License Plate Lights.......................... 638
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights .................................................... 633
Taillight, Brake Light and Back-Up Light... 636
Bulb Specifications ........................... 700, 702
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 75
Cargo Hooks ............................................. 233
Carrying Cargo ................................. 455, 457
Center Pocket ........................................... 223
Certification Label.................................... 704
Changing Bulbs ........................................ 631
Charging System Indicator................. 84, 681
Child Safety................................................. 61
Childproof Door Locks............................. 178
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 182
Child Seat.................................................... 61
Booster Seats ............................................ 74
Child Seat for Infants................................. 63
Child Seat for Small Children .................... 64
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Seat Belt................................... 69
Larger Children ......................................... 73
Rear-facing Child Seat............................... 63
Selecting a Child Seat ............................... 65
Using a Tether .......................................... 71
Childproof Door Locks............................. 178
Cleaning the Exterior............................... 657
Cleaning the Interior ............................... 655
Climate Control System ........................... 239
Changing the Mode................................ 239
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 240
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 654
Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode............ 239
Sensors ................................................... 242
Synchronized Mode ................................ 241
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 239
Clock ......................................................... 164
CMBS
TM
(Collision Mitigation Braking
System
TM
) ................................................ 510
Coat Hook ................................................ 233
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) ................................................. 510
Compact Spare Tire.................. 665, 701, 703
Console Compartment............................. 224
Continuously Variable Transmission
Creeping................................................. 474
Fluid ....................................................... 627
Kickdown ............................................... 474
715
Index
Operating the Shift Lever .......... 23, 483, 485
Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 677
Shifting........................................... 482, 484
Controls .................................................... 163
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 625
Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve
Tank ..................................................... 625
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 626
Overheating............................................ 679
Creeping (Automatic Transmission/
Continuously Variable Transmission).... 474
Cross Traffic Monitor ............................... 590
Cup Holders.............................................. 226
Customer Service Information ................ 712
Customized Features ....................... 370, 381
D
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 196
Dead Battery ............................................ 674
Defaulting All the Settings...................... 399
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows................................................. 240
Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 705
Dimming
Headlights .............................................. 193
Rearview Mirror ...................................... 208
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 618
Directional Signals (Turn Signal)............. 193
Door Mirrors............................................. 209
Doors ......................................................... 166
Auto Door Locking .................................. 179
Auto Door Unlocking............................... 179
Door and Trunk Open Message ................. 37
Keys ........................................................ 166
Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Inside ...................................... 176
Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Outside ................................... 169
Lockout Prevention System ...................... 175
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 645
Driver Attention Monitor ........................ 152
Driver Information Interface ................... 138
Switching the Display .............................. 138
Warning and Information Messages ........ 105
Driving....................................................... 453
Automatic Transmission/
Continuously Variable Transmission ....... 474
Braking.................................................... 571
Shifting Gear ................................... 475, 488
Shifting Position .............................. 482, 484
Starting the Engine .................................. 465
Driving Position Memory System............. 205
Driving Support Information ................... 155
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 654
E
Eco Assist® System ........................................ 9
ECON Button............................................. 492
Econ Mode
Indicator.................................................... 97
Elapsed Time............................................. 145
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator............................................ 92, 685
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 494
Emergency ................................................ 693
Emergency Engine Stop ........................... 673
Emergency Trunk Opener........................ 182
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 707
Engine ....................................................... 704
Coolant................................................... 625
Jump Starting.......................................... 674
Oil........................................................... 617
Starting................................................... 465
Engine Coolant......................................... 625
Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve
Tank...................................................... 625
Adding to the Radiator............................ 626
Overheating ............................................ 679
Temperature Gauge ................................ 137
Engine Oil ................................................. 617
Adding.................................................... 620
Checking................................................. 618
Displaying Oil Life.................................... 608
Low Oil Pressure Warning........................ 681
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 617
ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 190
EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ...... 685
Exhaust Gas Hazard
(Carbon Monoxide) .................................. 75
716
Index
Exterior Care (Cleaning) ........................... 657
Exterior Mirrors......................................... 209
F
Features..................................................... 243
Filters
Dust and Pollen ....................................... 654
Oil ........................................................... 621
Flat Tire ..................................................... 665
Floor Mats ................................................. 656
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........................... 628
Brake/Clutch............................................ 629
Continuously Variable Transmission ......... 627
Engine Coolant........................................ 625
Manual Transmission ............................... 627
Windshield Washer.................................. 630
FM/AM Radio .................................... 259, 298
Fog Lights.................................................. 195
Indicator.................................................... 94
Folding Down the Rear Seat .................... 214
Foot Brake................................................. 576
Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 48
Front Seat Heaters.................................... 236
Front Seat Heaters and Seat
Ventilation .............................................. 237
Front Seats
Adjusting................................................. 210
Front Sensor Camera ................................ 568
Fuel...................................................... 24, 597
Economy ................................................. 600
Gauge..................................................... 137
Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 143
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 89
Range ..................................................... 143
Recommendation .................................... 597
Refueling................................................. 597
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions ............ 600
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 24, 598
Unable to Unlock .................................... 694
Fuses.......................................................... 688
Inspecting and Changing......................... 692
Locations......................................... 688, 690
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy ................................................. 600
Gauge..................................................... 137
Information ............................................. 597
Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 143
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 89
Refueling................................................. 597
Gauges ...................................................... 137
Gear Position Indicator .............................. 84
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Continuously Variable
Transmission.................................. 482, 484
Manual Transmission............................... 488
Glass (care)........................................ 655, 658
Glove Box.................................................. 223
H
Halogen Bulbs .......................................... 631
Handling the Unexpected ....................... 663
HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ...................... 403, 427
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Call History ................................... 417, 436
Automatic Transferring ................... 415, 435
Displaying Messages ............................... 446
Favorite Contacts .................................... 437
HFL Buttons .................................... 403, 427
HFL Menus...................................... 405, 430
HFL Status Display........................... 404, 429
In Case of Emergency ..................... 325, 450
Limitations for Manual Operation.... 404, 429
Making a Call ................................. 421, 439
Options During a Call...................... 426, 442
Phone Setup ................................... 409, 432
Receiving a Call............................... 425, 442
Receiving a Text Message........................ 444
Ring Tone ....................................... 415, 435
Selecting a Phone ................................... 445
Speed Dial .............................................. 418
To Clear the System ................................ 416
To Set Up a Text Message Options .......... 443
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4
HD Radio
TM
............................................... 301
Head Restraints ........................................ 216
717
Index
Headlights ................................................ 193
Aiming.................................................... 631
Auto High-Beam ..................................... 197
Automatic Operation .............................. 194
Dimming......................................... 193, 196
Operating ............................................... 193
Head-Up Display ...................................... 157
Heated Steering Wheel ........................... 235
Heated Windshield Button...................... 202
Heaters (Seat)........................... 236, 237, 238
HFL (HandsFreeLink®) ...................... 403, 427
High Beam Indicator.................................. 94
Hill Start Assist System............................. 472
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ........... 400
Honda App License Agreement .............. 350
Honda Sensing® ................................. 25, 507
HondaLink® .............................................. 321
I
Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission......................... 704
Vehicle Identification............................... 704
Illumination Control
Dial......................................................... 203
Immobilizer System.................................. 183
Indicator ................................................... 95
Indicators.................................................... 78
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) (Amber) /Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) (Amber) ........................................ 99
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) (Green) /Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) (Green)........................ 100, 520, 536
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..................... 90
Auto High-Beam........................................ 90
Automatic Brake Hold ............... 82, 577, 578
Automatic Brake Hold System.... 82, 577, 578
Charging System ............................... 84, 681
ECON Mode ...................................... 97, 492
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System............................................. 92, 685
Fog Light ................................................... 94
Gear Position............................................. 84
High Beam ................................................ 94
Immobilizer System.................................... 95
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(Amber) ................................................. 100
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(Green) .......................................... 100, 552
Lights On................................................... 94
Low Fuel.................................................... 89
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............. 93, 497, 500
M (sequential mode/7-speed manual shift
mode) Indicator/Gear Selection
Indicator .................................................. 84
Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 83, 682
Parking Brake and Brake System
(Amber) ........................................... 80, 684
Parking Brake and Brake System
(Red)........................................ 79, 683, 684
Safety Support (Amber) ........................... 101
Safety Support (Green) ............................ 104
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 39, 89
Security System Alarm ............................... 96
Shift Down................................................ 88
Shift Up..................................................... 88
SPORT Mode ..................................... 98, 491
Supplemental Restraint System............ 58, 90
System Message........................................ 96
Transmission System............................ 85, 87
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 94
Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) OFF.... 92, 495
Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®)
System ............................................ 91, 494
Information .............................................. 699
Instant Fuel Economy............................... 143
Instrument Panel........................................ 77
Brightness Control................................... 203
Interior Lights........................................... 221
Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 208
iPad ........................................................... 349
iPhone ....................................................... 349
iPod ........................................... 261, 313, 349
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 668
Jump Starting ........................................... 674
718
Index
K
Key Number Tag ....................................... 167
Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... 175
Keys ........................................................... 166
Lockout Prevention.................................. 175
Number Tag ............................................ 167
Rear Door Won’t Open ............................ 178
Remote Transmitter ................................. 173
Types and Functions ................................ 166
Valet Key................................................. 182
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission/
Continuously Variable Transmission)..... 474
Knee Airbags............................................... 52
L
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ......... 550
LaneWatch
TM
............................................. 505
Language (HFL)................................. 404, 429
LATCH (Child Seats) .................................... 66
Lights ................................................. 193, 631
Auto High-Beam...................................... 197
Automatic ............................................... 194
Bulb Replacement.................................... 631
Daytime Running Lights........................... 196
Fog Lights................................................ 195
High Beam Indicator .................................. 94
Interior .................................................... 221
Light Switches ......................................... 193
Lights On Indicator .................................... 94
Turn Signals............................................. 193
Load Limits................................................ 457
Locking/Unlocking.................................... 166
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.................. 179
Childproof Door Locks............................. 178
From Inside ............................................. 176
From Outside .......................................... 169
Keys ........................................................ 166
Using a Key ............................................. 174
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 175
Low Battery Charge ................................. 681
Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 89
Low Oil Pressure Warning ....................... 681
Low Remote Signal Strength................... 168
Lower Anchors............................................ 66
Lubricant Specifications Chart......... 700, 702
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 457
Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch....... 211
M
Maintenance..................................... 147, 603
Battery .................................................... 651
Brake/Clutch Fluid ................................... 629
Cleaning ................................................. 655
Climate Control System........................... 654
Coolant................................................... 625
Maintenance Minder
TM
............................ 607
Oil........................................................... 618
Precautions ............................................. 604
Radiator .................................................. 626
Remote Transmitter................................. 653
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 631
Safety ..................................................... 605
Service Items........................................... 611
Tires........................................................ 642
Transmission Fluid................................... 627
Under the Hood...................................... 614
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 83, 682
Manual Transmission ............................... 488
Map Lights................................................ 222
Maximum Load Limit............................... 457
Meters, Gauges ........................................ 137
Mirrors ...................................................... 208
Adjusting ................................................ 208
Door ....................................................... 209
Exterior ................................................... 209
Interior Rearview..................................... 208
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 660
Moonroof ................................................. 189
MP3................................................... 266, 316
MP3/WMA/AAC................................ 266, 316
Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 594
N
Navigation................................................ 146
Near Field Communication (NFC)............ 332
Numbers (Identification) ......................... 704
719
Index
O
Odometer ................................................. 140
Oil (Engine) .............................................. 617
Adding ................................................... 620
Checking ................................................ 618
Displaying Oil Life ................................... 608
Low Oil Pressure Warning ....................... 681
Oil Life .................................................... 147
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 617
Viscosity.................................................. 617
Open Source Licenses .............................. 364
Opening
Trunk...................................................... 695
Opening/Closing
Hood ...................................................... 616
Moonroof ............................................... 189
Power Windows...................................... 186
Trunk...................................................... 180
Outside Temperature Display ................. 141
Overheating ............................................. 679
P
Paddle Shifters
(7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) ............... 486
Pandora® .................................................. 264
Panic Mode............................................... 185
Parking ..................................................... 583
Parking Brake........................................... 571
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
(Amber)..................................................... 80
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
(Red) .......................................... 79, 683, 684
Parking Sensor System ............................. 585
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ....... 59
Passing Indicators ..................................... 193
Phone ........................................................ 148
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 269, 319
Power Windows........................................ 186
Precautions While Driving ....................... 473
Rain......................................................... 473
Pregnant Women ....................................... 43
Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 665
R
Radiator .................................................... 626
Radio (AM/FM).................................. 259, 298
Radio (SiriusXM®) ..................................... 302
Radio Data System (RDS).................. 260, 300
Range ........................................................ 143
RDS (Radio Data System).................. 260, 300
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 707
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button ..................................................... 202
Rear Seat (Folding Down) ........................ 214
Rear Seat Heaters ..................................... 238
Rearview Mirror........................................ 208
Refueling................................................... 597
Fuel Gauge.............................................. 137
Gasoline .................................. 597, 700, 702
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 89
Regulations............................... 500, 645, 705
Remote Engine Start with Vehicle
Feedback ................................................. 469
Remote Transmitter ................................. 173
Replacement
Battery .................................................... 653
Bulbs....................................................... 631
Fuses............................................... 688, 690
Tires........................................................ 648
Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 639
Reporting Safety Defects......................... 706
Resetting a Trip Meter ..................... 141, 143
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ......... 558
On and Off.............................................. 560
S
Safe Driving ................................................ 33
Safety Check ............................................... 37
Safety Labels............................................... 76
Safety Message............................................. 1
Safety Support.......................................... 156
Seat Belts .................................................... 38
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 42
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 40
Checking................................................... 44
Fastening .................................................. 41
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 69
Pregnant Women ...................................... 43
Reminder .................................................. 39
720
Index
Warning Indicator................................ 39, 89
Seat Heaters.............................. 236, 237, 238
Seat Ventilation ........................................ 237
Seats .......................................................... 210
Adjusting................................................. 210
Front Seats .............................................. 210
Rear Seats................................................ 214
Seat Heaters ............................ 236, 237, 238
Seat Ventilation ....................................... 237
Security System ......................................... 183
Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 95
Security System Alarm Indicator ................. 96
Select Buttons ..................................... 20, 475
Operation ................................................ 476
Selecting a Child Seat ................................. 65
Selector Knob (Audio) .............................. 252
Shift Lever ........................... 23, 482, 484, 488
Operation .......................... 23, 483, 485, 488
Releasing................................................. 677
Won’t Move ............................................ 677
Shifting (Transmission)..... 475, 482, 484, 488
Shoulder Anchor......................................... 42
Side Airbags ................................................ 55
Side Curtain Airbags................................... 57
Siri® Eyes Free.................................... 272, 335
SiriusXM® Radio ........................................ 302
Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System...................................................... 169
Snow Tires ................................................. 650
Spare Tire .................................. 665, 701, 703
Spark Plugs........................................ 700, 702
Specifications............................................ 700
Specified Fuel ........................... 597, 700, 702
Speedometer ............................................ 137
SPORT Mode ............................................. 491
Indicator.................................................... 98
SRS Airbags (Airbags)................................. 48
Starting the Engine .................................. 465
Does Not Start......................................... 671
Jump Starting.......................................... 674
Steering Wheel
Adjusting ................................................ 207
Stopping ................................................... 583
Summer Tires............................................ 650
Sunglasses Holder..................................... 234
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 48
Switches
(Around the Steering Wheel) ........ 4, 5, 190
System Message Indicator.......................... 96
System Updates ........................................ 286
T
Tachometer............................................... 149
Temperature
Gauge..................................................... 137
Outside Temperature Display................... 141
Temperature Sensor......................... 141, 242
Time (Adjusting)....................................... 164
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 497
Indicator............................................ 93, 686
Tires .......................................................... 642
Air Pressure............................. 643, 701, 703
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 642
Inspection ............................................... 642
Labeling.................................................. 643
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 665
Regulations............................................. 645
Rotation.................................................. 649
Spare Tire ............................... 665, 701, 703
Summer.................................................. 650
Tire Chains.............................................. 650
Wear Indicators....................................... 647
Winter .................................................... 650
Tools ......................................................... 664
Towing a Trailer....................................... 459
Equipment and Accessories..................... 461
Load Limits ............................................. 459
Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 463
Emergency.............................................. 693
TPMS
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ........ 497
Indicator ........................................... 93, 686
Traffic Sign Recognition System ............. 562
Transmission..................... 475, 482, 484, 488
Automatic............................................... 475
Continuously Variable ..................... 482, 484
Fluid ............................................... 627, 628
Gear Position Indicator.............................. 84
Manual ................................................... 488
Number .................................................. 704
721
Index
Transmission System
Indicator ................................................... 85
TRIP Button .............................................. 140
Trip Computer.................................. 142, 144
Trip Meter ................................ 141, 143, 145
Troubleshooting ...................................... 663
Blown Fuse ..................................... 688, 690
Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 29
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 30
Emergency Towing ................................. 693
Engine Won’t Start ................................. 671
Noise When Braking ................................. 31
Overheating............................................ 679
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 665
Rear Door Won’t Open ..................... 30, 178
Shift Lever Won’t Move .......................... 677
Warning Indicators.................................... 78
Trunk ........................................................ 180
Lid .......................................................... 180
Light Bulb ....................................... 700, 702
Main Switch............................................ 182
Unable to Open ...................................... 695
Turbo Engine Vehicle .............................. 601
Turn Signals.............................................. 193
Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 94
Turn-by-Turn Directions .......................... 161
U
Unlocking the Doors ................................ 169
Unlocking the Front Doors
from the Inside ......................................... 14
USB Flash Drives........................ 266, 316, 349
USB Ports................................................... 245
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System ..................................................... 169
V
Valet Key................................................... 182
Vanity Mirrors............................................... 7
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 704
Vehicle Speed ........................................... 160
Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) ................ 494
Off Button............................................... 495
Off Indicator.............................................. 92
System Indicator ........................................ 91
Ventilation ................................................ 237
Viscosity (Oil) ............................ 617, 701, 703
Voice Control Operation.......................... 295
Voice Portal Screen.................................. 296
Voice Recognition.................................... 295
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist®) ................ 494
W
Wallpaper ......................................... 255, 277
Warning and Information Messages....... 105
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 681
Warning Labels........................................... 76
Warnings................................................... 147
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 709
Watts................................................. 700, 702
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 647
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ... 664, 668
Wi-Fi Connection...................................... 330
Window Washers ..................................... 200
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 630
Switch..................................................... 200
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 186
Windshield
Cleaning ......................................... 655, 658
Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 240
Washer Fluid ........................................... 630
Wiper Blades........................................... 639
Wipers and Washers................................ 200
Winter Tires
Snow Tires .............................................. 650
Tire Chains .............................................. 650
Wipers and Washers................................. 200
Automatic Intermittent Wipers ................ 201
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 639
Wireless Charger ...................................... 230
WMA................................................. 266, 316
Worn Tires ................................................ 642
owners.honda.com (U.S.)
myhonda.ca (Canada)
2019 Honda Accord Sedan Owner’s Manual
©2018 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved
31TVA610
OM-08295
00X31-TVA-6100 Printed in U.S.A.
